Reduce font size Increase font size

Road Rules 2008

[2008-179]


NSW Crest

Status Information

Currency of version
Current version for 14 January 2013 to date (accessed 23 May 2013 at 09:23).
Legislation on this site is usually updated within 3 working days after a change to the legislation.

Provisions in force
The provisions displayed in this version of the legislation have all commenced. See Historical notes

Does not include amendments by:
Road Transport (Statutory Rules) Act 2013 No 20 (not commenced — to commence on the day (the repeal day) on which Sch 1 to the Road Transport Legislation (Repeal and Amendment) Act 2013 commences)

See also:
Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Amendment (Child Safety on School Buses) Bill 2012 [Non-government Bill: Hon Cate Faehrmann, MLC]

Staged repeal status
This legislation is currently due to be automatically repealed under the Subordinate Legislation Act 1989 on 1 September 2013

Authorisation
This version of the legislation is compiled and maintained in a database of legislation by the Parliamentary Counsel's Office and published on the NSW legislation website, and is certified as the form of that legislation that is correct under section 45C of the Interpretation Act 1987.

File last modified 3 April 2013.

Contents

Part 1 Introductory

Division 1 General

1 Name of Rules
2 Commencement
3 Objects of these Rules

Division 2 Some features of these Rules

4 Definitions—the Dictionary etc
5 Diagrams
6 Examples
7 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
8 Notes
9 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
10 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
10–1 NSW rule: determination of criminal responsibility
10–2 NSW rule: penalties and disqualifications for speeding offences

Part 2 Application of these Rules

Division 1 Roads and road related areas

11 Rules apply to vehicles and road users on roads and road related areas
12 What is a road
13 What is a road related area

Division 2 Road users and vehicles

14 Road users
15 What is a vehicle
16 Who is a driver
17 Who is a rider
18 Who is a pedestrian
19 References to driver includes rider etc

Part 3 Speed limits

20 Obeying the speed limit
21 Speed limit where a speed limit sign applies
21–1 NSW rule: school bus stop zone sign is speed limit sign
22 Speed limit in a speed limited area
23 Speed limit in a school zone
24 Speed limit in a shared zone
24–1 NSW rule: speed limits for learner and provisional licence holders
24–2 NSW rule: speed limit on Lord Howe Island
24–3 NSW rule: speed limit when bus displaying when lights flash speed limit sign
24–4 NSW rule: speed limits for small motor bikes during periods of darkness
25 Speed limit elsewhere
25–1 NSW rule: drivers to which Part does not apply

Part 4 Making turns

Division 1 Left turns

26 Application of Division to roundabouts, road related areas and adjacent land
27 Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)
28 Starting a left turn from a multi-lane road
29 Making a left turn as indicated by a turn line

Division 2 Right turns

30 Application of Division to certain right turns
31 Starting a right turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)
32 Starting a right turn from a multi-lane road
33 Making a right turn

Division 3 Hook turns at intersections

34 Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign
35 Optional hook turn by a bicycle rider
36 Bicycle rider making a hook turn contrary to no hook turn by bicycles sign

Division 4 U-turns

Note
37 Beginning a U-turn
38 Giving way when making a U-turn
39 Making a U-turn contrary to a no U-turn sign
40 Making a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights
41 Making a U-turn at an intersection without traffic lights
42 Starting a U-turn at an intersection
43 (Repealed)

Part 5 Change of direction and stop signals

Division 1 Change of direction signals

44 Division does not apply to entering or leaving a roundabout
45 What is changing direction
46 Giving a left change of direction signal
47 How to give a left change of direction signal
48 Giving a right change of direction signal
49 How to give a right change of direction signal
50 How to give a right change of direction signal by giving a hand signal
51 When use of direction indicator lights permitted

Division 2 Stop signals

52 Division does not apply to bicycle riders or certain tram drivers
53 Giving a stop signal
54 How to give a stop signal
55 How to give a stop signal by giving a hand signal

Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrows and twin red lights

Division 1 Obeying traffic lights and traffic arrows

Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
56 Stopping for a red traffic light or arrow
57 Stopping for a yellow traffic light or arrow
58 Exceptions to stopping for a red or yellow traffic light
59 Proceeding through a red traffic light
60 Proceeding through a red traffic arrow
60A Proceeding through a bicycle storage area before a red traffic light or arrow
61 Proceeding when traffic lights or arrows at an intersection change to yellow or red

Division 2 Giving way at traffic lights and traffic arrows

Note
62 Giving way when turning at an intersection with traffic lights
63 Giving way at an intersection with traffic lights not operating or only partly operating
64 Giving way at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection
65 Giving way at a marked foot crossing (except at an intersection) with a flashing yellow traffic light

Division 3 Twin red lights (except at level crossings)

66 Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossings)

Part 7 Giving way

Note 1
Note 2

Division 1 Giving way at a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to the driver

Note
67 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an intersection without traffic lights
68 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at other places
69 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at an intersection (except a roundabout)
70 Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or length of narrow road
71 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at other places

Division 2 Giving way at an intersection without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to the driver

Note
72 Giving way at an intersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout)
73 Giving way at a T-intersection

Division 3 Entering or leaving road related areas and adjacent land

74 Giving way when entering a road from a road related area or adjacent land
75 Giving way when entering a road related area or adjacent land from a road

Division 4 Keeping clear of and giving way to particular vehicles

76 Keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes etc
77 Giving way to buses
78 Keeping clear of police and emergency vehicles
79 Giving way to police and emergency vehicles
79–1 NSW rule: interfering or interrupting funeral cortege or authorised procession
79–2 NSW rule: precedence at ferries, punts, bridges or railway crossings

Division 5 Crossings and shared zones

80 Stopping at a children’s crossing
81 Giving way at a pedestrian crossing
82 Overtaking or passing a vehicle at a children’s crossing or pedestrian crossing
83 Giving way to pedestrians in a shared zone

Division 6 Other give way rules

84 Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip
85 Giving way on a painted island
86 Giving way in median turning bays
87 Giving way when moving from a side of a road or a median strip parking area

Part 8 Traffic signs and road markings

Note 1
Note 2
Note 3

Division 1 Traffic signs and road markings at intersections and other places

Note
88 Left turn signs
89 Right turn signs
90 No turns signs
91 No left turn and no right turn signs
92 Traffic lane arrows

Division 2 Traffic signs and road markings generally

93 No overtaking or passing signs
94 No overtaking on bridge signs
95 Emergency stopping lane only signs
96 Keep clear markings
97 Road access signs
98 One-way signs
99 Keep left and keep right signs
100 No entry signs
101 Hand-held stop signs
101A Safety ramp and arrester bed signs

Division 3 Signs for trucks, buses and other large vehicles

102 Clearance and low clearance signs
103 Load limit signs
104 No trucks signs
105 Trucks must enter signs
106 No buses signs
107 Buses must enter signs
108 Trucks and buses low gear signs

Part 9 Roundabouts

109 What is a roundabout
110 Meaning of halfway around a roundabout
111 Entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road or a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction
112 Giving a left change of direction signal when entering a roundabout
113 Giving a right change of direction signal when entering a roundabout
114 Giving way when entering or driving in a roundabout
115 Driving in a roundabout to the left of the central traffic island
116 Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving a roundabout
117 Giving a change of direction signal when changing marked lanes or lines of traffic in a roundabout
118 Giving a left change of direction signal when leaving a roundabout
119 Giving way by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle leaving a roundabout

Part 10 Level crossings

120 What is a level crossing
121 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a level crossing
122 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at a level crossing
123 Entering a level crossing when a train or tram is approaching etc
124 Leaving a level crossing

Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules

Division 1 General

125 Unreasonably obstructing drivers or pedestrians
126 Keeping a safe distance behind vehicles
127 Keeping a minimum distance between long vehicles
128 Entering blocked intersections
128A Entering blocked crossings

Division 2 Keeping to the left

129 Keeping to the far left side of a road
130 Keeping to the left on a multi-lane road
131 Keeping to the left of oncoming vehicles
132 Keeping to the left of the centre of a road or the dividing line
133 Exceptions to keeping to the left of the centre of a road
134 Exceptions to keeping to the left of a dividing line
135 Keeping to the left of a median strip
136 Driving on a one-way service road
137 Keeping off a dividing strip
138 Keeping off a painted island
139 Exceptions for avoiding obstructions on a road

Division 3 Overtaking

140 No overtaking unless safe to do so
141 No overtaking etc to the left of a vehicle
142 No overtaking to the right of a vehicle turning right etc
143 Passing or overtaking a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign
144 Keeping a safe distance when overtaking
145 Driver being overtaken not to increase speed

Division 4 Driving in marked lanes or lines of traffic

146 Driving within a single marked lane or line of traffic
147 Moving from one marked lane to another marked lane across a continuous line separating the lanes
148 Giving way when moving from one marked lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic
148A Giving way when moving within a single marked lane
149 Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic
150 Driving on or across a continuous white edge line
151 Riding a motor bike or bicycle alongside more than 1 other rider

Division 5 Obeying overhead lane control devices applying to marked lanes

152 Complying with overhead lane control devices

Division 6 Driving in marked lanes designated for special purposes

153 Bicycle lanes
154 Bus lanes
155 Tram lanes
155A Tramways
156 Transit lanes
157 Truck lanes
157–1 NSW rule: T-Way lanes
158 Exceptions to driving in special purpose lanes etc
159 Marked lanes required to be used by particular kinds of vehicles

Division 7 Passing trams and safety zones

Note
160 Passing or overtaking a tram that is not at or near the left side of a road
161 Passing or overtaking a tram at or near the left side of a road
162 Driving past a safety zone
163 Driving past the rear of a stopped tram at a tram stop
164 Stopping beside a stopped tram at a tram stop
164A Staying stopped if a tram comes from behind a stopped driver and stops

Part 12 Restrictions on stopping and parking

Division 1 General

Note 1
Note 2
165 Stopping in an emergency etc or to comply with another rule
166 Application of Part to bicycles

Division 2 No stopping and no parking signs and road markings

Note 1
Note 2
167 No stopping signs
167–1 NSW rule: no standing signs
167–2 NSW rule: taxis stopping in Central Sydney Taxi Zone
168 No parking signs
168–1 NSW rule: restricted parking areas
169 No stopping on a road with a yellow edge line

Division 3 Stopping at intersections and crossings

Note 1
Note 2
170 Stopping in or near an intersection
171 Stopping on or near a children’s crossing
172 Stopping on or near a pedestrian crossing (except at an intersection)
173 Stopping on or near a marked foot crossing (except at an intersection)
174 Stopping at or near bicycle crossing lights (except at an intersection)
175 Stopping on or near a level crossing

Division 4 Stopping on clearways and freeways and in emergency stopping lanes

Note 1
Note 2
176 Stopping on a clearway
176–1 NSW rule: stopping next to clearway (no stopping) line
177 Stopping on a freeway
178 Stopping in an emergency stopping lane

Division 5 Stopping in zones for particular vehicles

Note 1
Note 2
Note 3
179 Stopping in a loading zone
179–1 NSW rule: stopping in ticket-operated loading zone
180 Stopping in a truck zone
181 Stopping in a works zone
182 Stopping in a taxi zone
183 Stopping in a bus zone
184 Stopping in a minibus zone
185 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
186 Stopping in a mail zone

Division 6 Other places where stopping is restricted

Note 1
Note 2
187 Stopping in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, tramway, transit lane, truck lane or on tram tracks
188 Stopping in a shared zone
189 Double parking
190 Stopping in or near a safety zone
191 Stopping near an obstruction
192 Stopping on a bridge or in a tunnel etc
193 Stopping on a crest or curve outside a built-up area
194 Stopping near a fire hydrant etc
195 Stopping at or near a bus stop
196 Stopping at or near a tram stop
197 Stopping on a path, dividing strip, nature strip or painted island
198 Obstructing access to and from a footpath, driveway etc
199 Stopping near a postbox
200 Stopping on roads—heavy and long vehicles
201 Stopping on a road with bicycle parking sign
202 Stopping on a road with motor bike parking sign
203 Stopping in a parking area for people with disabilities
203A Stopping in a slip lane

Division 7 Permissive parking signs and parking fees

Note 1
Note 2
204 Meaning of certain information on or with permissive parking signs
205 Parking for longer than indicated
205A Parking outside times indicated
205A–1 NSW rule: parking in special event parking areas
206 Time extension for people with disabilities
207 Parking where fees are payable
207–1 NSW rule: parking in metered parking areas
207–2 NSW rule: parking in metered parking spaces
207–3 NSW rule: parking in ticket parking areas
207–4 NSW rule: parking in ticket parking spaces
207–5 NSW rule: parking in coupon parking areas
207–6 NSW rule: parking in coupon parking spaces
207–7 NSW rule: parking in temporarily closed pay parking areas and spaces
207–8 NSW rule: parking in phone parking areas
207–9 NSW rule: parking in phone parking spaces

Division 8 Parallel parking

Note 1
Note 2
208 Parallel parking on a road (except in a median strip parking area)
208A Parallel parking in a road related area (except in a median strip parking area)
209 Parallel parking in a median strip parking area

Division 9 Angle parking

Note 1
Note 2
210 Angle parking

Division 10 Other parking related rules

Note 1
Note 2
211 Parking in parking bays
212 Entering and leaving a median strip parking area
213 Making a motor vehicle secure
213–1 NSW rule: exemption orders for rule 213

Part 13 Lights and warning devices

Division 1 Lights on vehicles (except bicycles, animals and animal-drawn vehicles)

214 Division does not apply to riders of bicycles, animals or animal-drawn vehicles
214–1 NSW rule: interpretation
215 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
215–1 NSW rule: using lights when driving in dark
216 Towing a vehicle at night or in hazardous weather conditions
217 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
218 Using headlights on high-beam
218–1 NSW rule: using lights on vehicles generally
219 Lights not to be used to dazzle other road users
220 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
220–1 NSW rule: using lights on stationary vehicles
221 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
221–1 NSW rule: using crimson flashing warning lights on certain local council vehicles
221–2 NSW rule: using flashing warning lights on street vending vehicles
222 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
222–1 NSW rule: using four-way flashers on school buses
222–2 NSW rule: using warning systems for buses carrying school children

Division 2 Lights on animal-drawn vehicles

223 Using lights when riding an animal-drawn vehicle at night or in hazardous weather conditions

Division 3 Horns and radar detectors

224 Using horns and similar warning devices
225 Australian Road Rule not reproduced

Division 4 Portable warning triangles for heavy vehicles

226 Heavy vehicles to be equipped with portable warning triangles
227 Using portable warning triangles

Part 14 Rules for pedestrians

Division 1 General

Note 1
Note 2
228 No pedestrians signs
229 Pedestrians on a road with a road access sign
229–1 NSW Rule: exemption from prohibition on pedestrians being on a road with a road access sign
230 Crossing a road—general
231 Crossing a road at pedestrian lights
232 Crossing a road at traffic lights
233 Crossing a road to or from a tram
234 Crossing a road on or near a crossing for pedestrians
235 Crossing a level crossing
235A Crossing a pedestrian level crossing that has a red pedestrian light
236 Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard or obstruction
237 Getting on or into a moving vehicle
238 Pedestrians travelling along a road (except in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy)
239 Pedestrians on a bicycle path or separated footpath

Division 2 Rules for persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices and wheeled toys

Note 1
Note 2
240A No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign
240 Wheeled recreational devices and toys not to be used on certain roads
241 Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a road
242 Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a footpath or shared path
243 Travelling on rollerblades etc on a bicycle path or separated footpath
244 Wheeled recreational devices or wheeled toys being towed etc
244A Australian Road Rule not reproduced
244B Australian Road Rule not reproduced
244C Australian Road Rule not reproduced

Part 15 Additional rules for bicycle riders

Note 1
Note 2
245 Riding a bicycle
245–1 NSW rule: riding a bicycle negligently, furiously or recklessly
246 Carrying people on a bicycle
247 Riding in a bicycle lane on a road
247A Entering a bicycle storage area
247B Giving way while entering or in a bicycle storage area
248 No riding across a road on a crossing
249 Riding on a separated footpath
250 Riding on a footpath or shared path
250–1 NSW rule: children under 12 years not to ride on certain footpaths
251 Riding to the left of oncoming bicycle riders on a path
252 No bicycles signs and markings
253 Bicycle riders not to cause a traffic hazard
254 Bicycles being towed etc
255 Riding too close to the rear of a motor vehicle
256 Bicycle helmets
257 Riding with a person on a bicycle trailer
258 Equipment on a bicycle
259 Riding at night
260 Stopping for a red bicycle crossing light
261 Stopping for a yellow bicycle crossing light
262 Proceeding when bicycle crossing lights change to yellow or red

Part 16 Rules for persons travelling in or on vehicles

263 Application of Part to persons in or on trams
264 Wearing of seatbelts by drivers
265 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or older
266 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years old
267 Exemptions from wearing seatbelts
267–1 NSW rule: restraint of drivers who are holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their passengers
267–2 NSW rule: exemption from front seat position restrictions
268 How persons must travel in or on a motor vehicle
268–1 NSW rule: exemptions from rule 268
268–2 NSW rule: how persons must travel in or on boots
268–3 NSW rule: how persons must travel in or on trailers
269 Opening doors and getting out of a vehicle etc
270 Wearing motor bike helmets
271 Riding on motor bikes
271–1 NSW rule: passengers on motor bikes not permitted unless rider holds licence for at least 12 months
271–2 NSW rule: children under 16 years travelling in or on car-based motor tricycles
272 Interfering with the driver’s control of the vehicle etc

Part 17 Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram recovery vehicles and public buses

Note 1
Note 2

Division 1 Trams

Note
273 Division also applies to tram recovery vehicles and public buses travelling along tram tracks
274 Stopping for a red T light
275 Stopping for a yellow T light
276 Exception to stopping for a red or yellow T light
277 Proceeding after stopping for a red or yellow T light
278 Proceeding when a red traffic light and a white T light or white traffic arrow is showing
279 Proceeding when a white T light or white traffic arrow is no longer showing

Division 2 Public buses

Note
280 Application of Division
281 Stopping for a red B light
282 Stopping for a yellow B light
283 Exception to stopping for a red or yellow B light
284 Proceeding after stopping for a red or yellow B light
285 Proceeding when a red traffic light and a white B light or white traffic arrow is showing
286 Proceeding when a white B light or white traffic arrow is no longer showing

Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules

Division 1 Miscellaneous rules for drivers

287 Duties of a driver involved in a crash
288 Driving on a path
289 Driving on a nature strip
290 Driving on a traffic island
291 Making unnecessary noise or smoke
291–1 NSW rule: engine of stationary vehicle to be switched off to prevent noise
291–2 NSW rule: use of vehicle that drops waste oil or grease
291–3 NSW rule: splashing mud on bus passengers
292 Insecure or overhanging load
293 Removing fallen etc things from the road
294 Keeping control of a vehicle being towed
294–1 NSW rule: number of vehicles that may be towed together
294–2 NSW rule: towing by vehicles under 4.5 tonnes
294–3 NSW rule: towing restrictions generally
294–4 NSW rule: special provisions relating to boat trailers
295 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
296 Driving a vehicle in reverse
297 Driver to have proper control of a vehicle etc
298 Driving with a person in a trailer
298–1 NSW rule: drinking while driving
299 Television receivers and visual display units in motor vehicles
300 Use of mobile phones by drivers (except holders of learner or provisional P1 licences)
300–1 NSW rule: use of mobile phones by drivers who are holders of learner and provisional P1 licences
300–2 NSW rule: carriage of dangerous goods in prohibited areas
300–3 NSW rule: driving lengthy vehicles in central Sydney and on certain other roads
300–4 NSW rule: school bus signs for school buses
300–5 NSW rule: driver to carry licence while driving motor vehicle

Division 2 Rules for people in charge of animals

301 Leading an animal while in or on a vehicle
302 Rider of an animal on a footpath or nature strip to give way to pedestrians
303 Riding an animal alongside more than 1 other rider

Division 3 Obeying directions

304 Direction by a police officer or authorised person

Part 19 Exemptions

305 Exemption for drivers of police vehicles
306 Exemption for drivers of emergency vehicles
307 Stopping and parking exemption for police and emergency vehicles and authorised persons
307–1 NSW rule: exemption for drivers conducting mobile speed camera operations
308 Exemption for police officers and emergency workers on foot
309 Exemption for drivers of trams etc
310 Exemption for road workers etc
311 Exemption for oversize vehicles
312 Exemption for tow truck drivers
313 Exemption for postal vehicles
313–1 NSW rule: exemptions for cash in transit vehicle drivers and escort vehicle drivers
313A Exemption for garbage truck drivers etc
313B Australian Road Rule not reproduced

Part 20 Traffic control devices and traffic-related items

Division 1 General

Note
314 Diagrams of traffic control devices, traffic-related items and symbols
315 Legal effect of traffic control devices mentioned in these Rules
316 When do traffic control devices comply substantially with these Rules
316–1 NSW rule: minimum sizes for do not overtake turning vehicle signs and give way to buses signs
316–2 NSW rule: do not overtake turning vehicle signs to be used only on vehicles 7.5 metres long or longer
317 Information on or with traffic control devices
318 Limited effect of certain traffic control devices
319 Legal effect of traffic-related items mentioned in these Rules
320 When do traffic-related items comply substantially with these Rules
321 Meaning of information on or with traffic control devices and traffic-related items
322 References to traffic control devices and traffic-related items on a road etc
323 References to lights that are traffic signals
323A Audible lines

Division 2 Application of traffic control devices to lengths of roads and areas

Note
324 Purpose of Division
325 References to traffic control devices—application to lengths of road and areas
326 When do traffic control devices apply to a length of road or area—the basic rules
327 Length of road to which a traffic sign (except a parking control sign) applies
328 References to a traffic control device applying to a length of road
329 Traffic control devices applying to a marked lane
330 Traffic control devices applying to a slip lane
331 Traffic control devices applying to an intersection
332 Parking control signs applying to a length of road
333 Parking control signs applying to a length of road in an area to which another parking control sign applies etc
334 How parking control signs apply to a length of road
335 Traffic control devices applying to an area
336 How separated footpath signs and separated footpath road markings apply

Division 3 Application of traffic control devices to persons

Note
337 Purpose of Division
338 References to traffic control devices—application to persons
339 When do traffic control devices apply to a person—the basic rules
340 Traffic control devices (except road markings and parking control signs)
341 Road markings
342 Traffic signs (except parking control signs) applying to a length of road
343 Traffic signs (except parking control signs) applying to an area
344 Traffic control devices applying to a driver in a marked lane
345 Traffic control devices applying to a driver in a slip lane
346 Parking control signs

Part 21 General

347 Meaning of abbreviations and symbols
348 References to a driver doing something etc
349 References to certain kinds of roads
350 References to stopping or parking on a length of road etc
351 References to left and right
352 References to stopping as near as practicable to a place
352–1
352–2
353 References to pedestrians crossing a road
353–1 NSW rule: amendment, repeal etc of approvals and other matters under these Rules
353–2 NSW rule: savings and transitional provisions

Schedule 1 Abbreviations and symbols

Schedule 2 Standard traffic signs used in NSW

Schedule 3 Non-standard traffic signs used in NSW

Schedule 4 Symbols and traffic-related items

Dictionary

Historical notes

NSW Crest

Part 1 Introductory

Division 1 General

1   Name of Rules

These Rules are the Road Rules 2008.

2   Commencement

These Rules commence on 1 July 2008.

3   Objects of these Rules

The objects of these Rules are:
(a)  to consolidate in a single instrument the road rules that are applicable in New South Wales, and
(b)  to provide for road rules that are based on the Australian Road Rules so as to ensure that the road rules applicable in this State are substantially uniform with road rules applicable elsewhere in Australia, and
(c)  to provide for other road rules to be observed in this State in relation to matters that are not otherwise dealt with in the Australian Road Rules.
Note. This rule is not uniform with the corresponding rule 3 of the Australian Road Rules.

Division 2 Some features of these Rules

4   Definitions—the Dictionary etc

(1)  The Dictionary at the end of these Rules defines certain words and expressions, and includes references to certain words and expressions defined elsewhere in these Rules (signpost definitions).
Example. The signpost definition “road related area—see rule 13” means that the expression road related area is defined in rule 13 of these Rules.
Note. The Dictionary only includes a signpost definition for a word or expression if the word or expression is used in 2 or more rules of these Rules.
(2)  The Dictionary is part of these Rules.
(3)  A definition in these Rules applies to each use of the word or expression in these Rules, unless the contrary intention appears.
(3–1)  If a word or expression used in a provision of these Rules is defined in the Act, it has the same meaning as in the Act, unless the word or expression is defined in these Rules for the purposes of the provision or these Rules generally.
Note 1. The Act is defined in the Dictionary. A number of words or expressions used in these Rules are also defined in the Dictionary to the Act.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 4 of the Australian Road Rules.

5   Diagrams

A diagram in these Rules is part of these Rules.
Note 1. If a diagram of a traffic control device, traffic-related item or symbol is in black and white in a rule of these Rules, the diagram may be a black and white version of the device, item or symbol—see rule 314. If so, the colour version of the device, item or symbol will be in Schedule 2, 3 or 4.
Note 2. A diagram may be an example—see rule 6 (1).

6   Examples

(1)  An example (whether or not in the form of a diagram) in these Rules is part of these Rules.
(2)  If these Rules include an example of the operation of a provision of these Rules:
(a)  the example is not exhaustive, and
(b)  the example does not limit, but may extend, the meaning of the provision.

7   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 7 (Headings) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules because section 35 of the Interpretation Act 1987 makes provision for the status of headings in legislation of this jurisdiction.

8   Notes

A note in these Rules is explanatory and is not part of these Rules.

9   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note 1. Rule 9 (Reader’s Guide) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules because the Reader’s Guide to which that rule refers has not been included in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.
Note 2. For the purposes of comparison, a number of provisions of these Rules contain bracketed notes in headings drawing attention (“cf RRR”) to equivalent or comparable (though not necessarily identical) provisions of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) (Road Rules) Regulation 1999 as in force immediately before the commencement of these Rules.

10   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note 1. Rule 10 (Offences) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules because it is unnecessary. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.
Note 2. These Rules indicate whether a contravention of a rule is an offence by the use of the words “penalty” or “maximum penalty” as appropriate—see rule 10–1 (4) and sections 17 (Penalty units) and 18 (Interpretation of provisions imposing penalties) of the Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act 1999.

10–1   NSW rule: determination of criminal responsibility

(cf RRR, cll 33–35)

(1) Application of Commonwealth Criminal Code
Subject to this rule, Chapter 2 of the Criminal Code set out in the Schedule to the Criminal Code Act 1995 of the Commonwealth (the Commonwealth Criminal Code) applies to an offence against these Rules as if the Chapter were in force as a law of New South Wales.
Note. Chapter 2 of the Commonwealth Criminal Code codifies the general principles of criminal responsibility.
(2) Offences are strict liability offences
An offence against these Rules is a strict liability offence for the purposes of Chapter 2 of the Commonwealth Criminal Code (as applied by subrule (1)), except where these Rules expressly provide otherwise.
(3) General defence of accident or reasonable effort
Without limiting any defence under Chapter 2 of the Commonwealth Criminal Code (as applied by subrule (1)), a person is not liable to a penalty for any offence under these Rules if the person proves to the satisfaction of the court dealing with the case that the offence:
(a)  was the result of an accident, or
(b)  could not have been avoided by any reasonable efforts on the person’s part.
(4) Operation of Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act 1999 not affected
Nothing in these Rules affects the application of the Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act 1999 in relation to these Rules (particularly, Divisions 4 and 5 of Part 2 of that Act).
Note 1. Divisions 4 and 5 of Part 2 of the Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act 1999 contain provisions relating to how offence provisions are to be interpreted. For instance, section 17 of that Act defines the amount of a penalty unit. Similarly, section 18 of that Act sets out rules for interpreting provisions in legislation that impose penalties.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules. However, it is intended that each Australian jurisdiction that adopts the Australian Road Rules is to apply the provisions of the Commonwealth Criminal Code to offences against the uniform rules.

10–2   NSW rule: penalties and disqualifications for speeding offences

(cf RRR cl 154)

(1) Definitions
In this rule:

heavy motor vehicle means:

(a)  a motor vehicle with a GVM over 12 tonnes, or
(b)  a motor vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 12 tonnes.

large motor vehicle means:

(a)  a coach, or
(b)  a motor vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes, or
(c)  a motor vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 4.5 tonnes.

speed limit, in relation to a speeding offence, means the speed limit that was contravened in committing the offence.

speeding offence means an offence under Part 3 (Speed limits).

Note. Motor vehicle, combination and trailer are defined in the Dictionary, and coach, GCM and GVM are defined in the Act.
(2) Penalties and disqualifications for speeding offence
A driver who commits a speeding offence in any of the circumstances referred to in subrule (3), (5) or (6) is:
(a)  liable to the maximum penalty specified in this rule for an offence committed in those circumstances, and
(b)  disqualified from holding a driver licence for the period specified in this rule for an offence committed in those circumstances.
Note. Driver licence is defined in the Act.
(3) Exceeding speed limit by more than 45 kilometres per hour
A driver who commits a speeding offence by exceeding a speed limit by more than 45 kilometres per hour is:
(a)  liable to a maximum penalty of 34 penalty units (in the case of a heavy motor vehicle or coach) or 23 penalty units (in any other case), and
(b)  disqualified from holding a driver licence by a conviction for the offence (and without any specific order) for 6 months from holding a driver licence or, if the court on the conviction thinks fit to order a different period of disqualification determined in accordance with subrule (4), is disqualified for the period specified in the order.
Note. Coach is defined in the Act.
(4) Court-ordered disqualification periods under subrule (3)
In determining a different period of disqualification under subrule (3) for a driver who commits a speeding offence, the court may specify a period that is:
(a)  more than 6 months, or
(b)  less than 6 months, but only if:
(i)  the person’s driver licence or authority to drive in New South Wales has been suspended for a period (the suspension period) under section 205 or 206 of the Road Transport (General) Act 2005 for that offence, and
(ii)  the specified disqualification period when added to the suspension period results in a total period of no less than 6 months.
(5) Exceeding speed limit by more than 30 kilometres per hour
A driver who commits a speeding offence by exceeding a speed limit by more than 30 kilometres per hour is:
(a)  liable to a maximum penalty of 20 penalty units, and
(b)  disqualified from holding a driver licence by a conviction for the offence (and without any specific order) for 3 months from holding a driver licence or, if the court on the conviction thinks fit to order a longer period of disqualification, is disqualified for the period specified in the order.
(6) Exceeding speed limit on road by 30 kilometres per hour or less
A driver who commits a speeding offence by exceeding a speed limit by 30 kilometres per hour or less is liable to a maximum penalty of 20 penalty units.
(7) Alternative verdicts in prosecutions for speeding by more than 45 kilometres per hour
If a driver is prosecuted under subrule (3) for a speeding offence in circumstances where the court:
(a)  is satisfied that the person exceeded the relevant speed limit, but
(b)  is not satisfied that it was exceeded by more than 45 kilometres per hour,
      the court may instead convict the driver of an offence in accordance with subrule (5) if satisfied that the speed limit was exceeded by more than 30 kilometres per hour, or in accordance with subrule (6) if satisfied that the speed limit was exceeded by 30 kilometres per hour or less.
(8) Alternative verdicts in prosecutions for speeding by more than 30 kilometres per hour
If a driver is prosecuted under subrule (5) for a speeding offence in circumstances where the court:
(a)  is satisfied that the person exceeded the relevant speed limit, but
(b)  is not satisfied that the speed limit was exceeded by more than 30 kilometres per hour,
      the court may instead convict the driver of an offence in accordance with subrule (6).
(9) Disqualification period commences on date of conviction
A period of disqualification imposed by or under this rule commences on the date of conviction for the offence to which it relates.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules. However, the Australian Road Rules allow another law of this jurisdiction to make provision for penalties.

Part 2 Application of these Rules

Division 1 Roads and road related areas

11   Rules apply to vehicles and road users on roads and road related areas

(1)  These Rules apply to vehicles and road users on roads and road related areas.
Note. Road is defined in rule 12, road related area is defined in rule 13, road user is defined in rule 14, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.
(2)  Each reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to a road includes a reference to a road related area, unless otherwise expressly stated in these Rules.
Examples for subrule (2). 

1   A reference in rule 146 (which deals with driving within a single marked lane or line of traffic) to the road includes a reference to the road related area of the road.

2   A reference in rule 200 (1) (which deals with certain heavy or long vehicles stopping on roads) to a length of road includes a reference to the road related area of the length of road.

3   A reference in rule 31 (which deals with starting a right turn from a road, except a multi-lane road) to a road does not include a reference to a road related area, because of the definition in subrule (5) of that rule.

12   What is a road

(1)  A road is an area that is open to or used by the public and is developed for, or has as one of its main uses, the driving or riding of motor vehicles.
Note. Motor vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  However, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to a road does not include a reference to:
(a)  an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of this jurisdiction, not to be a road for these Rules, or
(b)  any shoulder of the road.
Note. The Minister administering the Road Transport (General) Act 2005, may, by order under section 15 of that Act, declare that provisions of the road transport legislation do not apply to a road or road related area or do apply to a specified area of the State that is open to or used by the public. The road transport legislation includes these Rules.
(3)  The shoulder of the road includes any part of the road that is not designed to be used by motor vehicles in travelling along the road, and includes:
(a)  for a kerbed road—any part of the kerb, and
(b)  for a sealed road—any unsealed part of the road, and any sealed part of the road outside an edge line on the road,
      but does not include a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.
Note. Bicycle path is defined in rule 239, edge line and footpath are defined in the Dictionary, and shared path is defined in rule 242.

13   What is a road related area

(1)  A road related area is any of the following:
(a)  an area that divides a road,
(b)  a footpath or nature strip adjacent to a road,
(c)  an area that is not a road and that is open to the public and designated for use by cyclists or animals,
(d)  an area that is not a road and that is open to or used by the public for driving, riding or parking vehicles.
Note. Vehicle is defined in rule 15.
(2)  However, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to a road related area includes a reference to:
(a)  an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of this jurisdiction, to be a road related area for these Rules, or
(b)  any shoulder of a road, or
(c)  any other area that is a footpath or nature strip as defined in the Dictionary,
      but does not include a reference to an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of this jurisdiction, not to be a road related area for these Rules.
Note 1. Shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. The Minister administering the Road Transport (General) Act 2005, may, by order under section 15 of that Act, declare that provisions of the road transport legislation do not apply to a road or road related area or do apply to a specified area of the State that is open to or used by the public. The road transport legislation includes these Rules.

Division 2 Road users and vehicles

14   Road users

A road user is a driver, rider, passenger or pedestrian.
Note. Driver is defined in rule 16, pedestrian is defined in rule 18, and rider is defined in rule 17.

15   What is a vehicle

A vehicle includes:
(a)  a motor vehicle, trailer and tram, and
(b)  a bicycle, and
(c)  an animal-drawn vehicle, and an animal that is being ridden or drawing a vehicle, and
(d)  a combination, and
(e)  a motorised wheelchair that can travel at over 10 kilometres per hour (on level ground),
but does not include another kind of wheelchair, a train, or a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy.
Note. Various terms mentioned in this rule are defined in the Dictionary.

16   Who is a driver

(1)  A driver is the person who is driving a vehicle (except a motor bike, bicycle, animal or animal-drawn vehicle).
Note 1. Bicycle and motor bike are defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.
Note 2. Drive includes be in control of—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  However, a driver does not include a person pushing a motorised wheelchair.
Note. Wheelchair is defined in the Dictionary.

17   Who is a rider

(1)  A rider is the person who is riding a motor bike, bicycle, animal or animal-drawn vehicle.
Note 1. Bicycle and motor bike are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Ride, for the rider of a motor bike or animal-drawn vehicle, includes be in control of—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  A rider does not include:
(a)  a passenger, or
(b)  a person walking beside and pushing a bicycle.

18   Who is a pedestrian

A pedestrian includes:
(a)  a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at over 10 kilometres per hour (on level ground), and
(b)  a person in a non-motorised wheelchair, and
(c)  a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised wheelchair, and
(d)  a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy.
Note. Wheelchair, wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the Dictionary.

19   References to driver includes rider etc

Unless otherwise expressly stated in these Rules, each reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to a driver includes a reference to a rider, and each reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to driving includes a reference to riding.

Part 3 Speed limits

20   Obeying the speed limit

A driver must not drive at a speed over the speed limit applying to the driver for the length of road where the driver is driving.

Penalty and disqualification: a driver who contravenes this rule is guilty of an offence and is liable to a maximum penalty and a period of disqualification (if any) determined in accordance with rule 10–2.

Note 1. The rules about speed limits are as follows:
•  rule 21—speed limit where a speed limit sign applies
•  rule 21–1—NSW rule: school bus stop zone sign is speed limit sign
•  rule 22—speed limit in a speed limited area
•  rule 23—speed limit in a school zone
•  rule 24—speed limit in a shared zone
•  rule 24–1—NSW rule: speed limits for learner and provisional licence holders
•  rule 24–2—NSW rule: speed limit on Lord Howe Island
•  rule 24–3—NSW rule: speed limit when bus displaying when lights flash speed limit sign
•  rule 24–4—NSW rule: speed limits for small motor bikes during periods of darkness
•  rule 25—speed limit elsewhere.
Note 2. Road includes a road related area—see rule 11 (2).
Note 3. Length of road includes a marked lane, a part of a marked lane, or another part of a length of road—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 4. Part 20, Division 2 deals with the way in which a traffic sign applies to a length of road. Part 20, Division 3 deals with the way in which the traffic sign applies to drivers driving on the length of road.
Note 5. Section 43A of the Act provides that a person bringing proceedings or issuing a penalty notice in which it is alleged that the driver of a heavy vehicle committed a speeding offence may rely on the average speed at which the vehicle travelled between different points on a road as evidence of the offence.

If there is more than one speed limit applicable to the driver between the different points, section 43A of the Act provides that for the purposes of such proceedings the speed limit that applied to the driver between those points is taken to be the average speed limit calculated in accordance with that section.

21   Speed limit where a speed limit sign applies

(1)  The speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road to which a speed limit sign applies is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on the sign.
Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  However, if the number on the speed limit sign is over 100 and the driver is driving a vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes or a vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 4.5 tonnes, the speed limit applying to the driver for the length of road is 100 kilometres per hour.
Note 1. Combination and trailer are defined in the Dictionary, vehicle is defined in rule 15, and GCM and GVM are defined in the Act.
Note 2. This subrule is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 21 of the Australian Road Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(3)  A speed limit sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:
(a)  a speed limit sign on the road with a different number on the sign,
(b)  an end speed limit sign or speed derestriction sign on the road,
(c)  if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of the road.
Note 1. T-intersection is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign on a road.
 

Speed limit signs

Speed limit sign

(Standard sign)

Speed limit sign

(Variable illuminated message sign)

Other signs

End speed limit sign

Speed derestriction sign

Note 1 for diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of the speed limit sign and the end speed limit sign—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. A speed limit sign or end speed limit sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).

21–1   NSW rule: school bus stop zone sign is speed limit sign

(cf RRR, cl 3 of Sch 1)

(1)  For the purposes of rule 21:
(a)  a school bus stop zone sign is a speed limit sign, and
(b)  an end school bus stop zone sign is an end speed limit sign in respect of a school bus stop zone sign.
(2)  For the purposes of the application of this Part with respect to a length of road to which a school bus stop zone sign applies, the speed limit indicated by the sign applies to a driver only while the warning system of a bus is activated along that length of road.
Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

warning system of a bus means the warning system referred to in clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.

 

School bus stop zone sign

End school bus stop zone sign

Note for diagrams. A school bus stop zone sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules. Different speed limit signs may apply to drivers in other Australian jurisdictions.

22   Speed limit in a speed limited area

(1)  The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a speed limited area is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on the area speed limit sign on a road into the area, unless another speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another rule of this Part.
Example of another speed limit. Although an area speed limit sign on a road into a speed limited area may indicate a speed limit of 60 kilometres per hour, a particular length of road in the area may have a school zone sign indicating a 40 kilometres per hour speed limit for that length of road.
Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A speed limited area is the network of roads in an area with:
(a)  an area speed limit sign on each road into the area, indicating the same number, and
(b)  an end area speed limit sign on each road out of the area.
(3)  In subrule (2) (a) and (b):

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13.
 

Area speed limit sign

End area speed limit sign

Note 1 for diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of each of these signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. An area speed limit sign or end area speed limit sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).

23   Speed limit in a school zone

(1)  The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a school zone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on the school zone sign on a road, or the road, into the zone.
Note 1. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A school zone sign may indicate that it applies only at certain times, on certain days or in certain circumstances—see rules 317 and 318.
Note 3. This subrule applies to road related areas in the school zone—see rule 11 (2).
(2)  A school zone is:
(a)  if there is a school zone sign and an end school zone sign, or a speed limit sign with a different number on the sign, on a road and there is no intersection on the length of road between the signs—that length of road, or
(b)  if there is a school zone sign on a road that ends in a dead end and there is no intersection, nor a sign mentioned in paragraph (a), on the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the dead end—that length of road, or
(c)  in any other case—the network of roads in an area with:
(i)  a school zone sign on each road into the area, indicating the same number, and
(ii)  an end school zone sign, or a speed limit sign indicating a different number, on each road out of the area.
Note. Intersection is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In subrule (2) (c) (i) and (ii):

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13.
 

School zone sign

End school zone sign

Note 1 for diagrams. There are other permitted versions of the school zone sign—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. A school zone sign or end school zone sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).
Note 3 for diagrams. School days are any days other than a Saturday or Sunday, a day that is a public holiday or a day publicly notified as a school holiday for government schools—see rule 318 (3–1).

24   Speed limit in a shared zone

(1)  The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a shared zone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on the shared zone sign on a road, or the road, into the zone.
Note. A driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian in the zone—see rule 83.
(2)  A shared zone is:
(a)  if there is a shared zone sign and an end shared zone sign on a road and there is no intersection on the length of road between the signs—that length of road, or
(b)  if there is a shared zone sign on a road that ends in a dead end and there is no intersection on the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the dead end—that length of road, or
(c)  a network of roads in an area with:
(i)  a shared zone sign on each road into the area, indicating the same number, and
(ii)  an end shared zone sign on each road out of the area, or
(d)  a road related area that is between a shared zone sign that relates to the area and an end shared zone sign that relates to the area.
Note. Intersection is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In subrule (2) (c) (i) and (ii):

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13.
 

Shared zone sign

End shared zone sign

24–1   NSW rule: speed limits for learner and provisional licence holders

(cf RRR, cl 38 (4)–(6))

(1) Speed limit applying to learner drivers
The speed limit applying for any length of road to a driver who is the holder of a learner licence is 80 kilometres per hour, unless another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another rule of this Part.
Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence is defined in the Act.
(2) Speed limit applying to P1 provisional drivers
The speed limit applying for any length of road to a driver who is the holder of a provisional P1 licence is 90 kilometres per hour, unless another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another rule of this Part.
Note. Provisional P1 licence is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) Speed limit applying to P2 provisional drivers
The speed limit applying for any length of road to a driver who is the holder of a provisional P2 licence is 100 kilometres per hour, unless another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another rule of this Part.
Note. Provisional P2 licence is defined in the Dictionary.
(4) Rule applies despite greater speed limits
This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part that specifies a speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road that is greater than the speed limit applying to the driver under this rule.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

24–2   NSW rule: speed limit on Lord Howe Island

(cf RRR, cl 39)

(1)  The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road on Lord Howe Island is 25 kilometres per hour.
Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part specifying the speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

24–3   NSW rule: speed limit when bus displaying when lights flash speed limit sign

(cf RRR, cl 40)

(1)  This rule applies to a driver if:
(a)  the vehicle being driven by the driver is approaching from the rear of a bus (whether stationary or in motion) that displays a when lights flash speed limit sign, and
(b)  the bus is fitted with a warning system, and
(c)  the warning system is activated.
Note. Bus is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The speed limit applying to a driver to whom this rule applies for any length of road while overtaking or passing the bus is 40 kilometres per hour, unless another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another rule of this Part.
Note. Length of road and overtake are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  This rule does not apply to a driver in relation to a length of road to which a sign referred to in rule 21–1 applies.
(4)  This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part that specifies a speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road that is greater than the speed limit applying to the driver under this rule.
(5)  In this rule:

warning system of a bus means the warning system referred to in clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.
 

When lights flash speed limit sign

Note for diagram. This sign is displayed on buses.

24–4   NSW rule: speed limits for small motor bikes during periods of darkness

(cf RRR, cl 54)

(1)  The speed limit applying to the rider of a motor bike on any length of road during a period of darkness is:
(a)  if the engine capacity of the bike does not exceed 100 millilitres—40 kilometres per hour, or
(b)  if the engine capacity of the bike exceeds 100 millilitres but does not exceed 200 millilitres—50 kilometres per hour,
      unless another lesser speed limit applies to the rider for the length of road under another rule of this Part.
Note. Length of road and motor bike are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  This rule does not apply to any motor bike that is fitted with a headlight having an effective range of at least 50 metres.
(3)  This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part that specifies a speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road that is greater than the speed limit applying to the driver under this rule.
(4)  In this rule:

headlight has the same meaning as in Division 1 of Part 13.

period of darkness has the same meaning as in Division 1 of Part 13.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

25   Speed limit elsewhere

(1)  If a speed limit sign does not apply to a length of road and the length of road is not in a speed limited area, school zone or shared zone, the speed limit applying to a driver for the length of road is the default speed limit.
Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary, school zone is defined in rule 23, shared zone is defined in rule 24, and speed limited area is defined in rule 22.
(2)  The default speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road in a built-up area is 50 kilometres per hour.
Note. Built-up area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  The default speed limit applying to a driver for any other length of road is:
(a)  for a driver driving a vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes or a vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 4.5 tonnes—100 kilometres per hour, or
(b)  for any other driver—100 kilometres per hour or as otherwise provided under another law of this jurisdiction.
Note 1. Combination and trailer are defined in the Dictionary, vehicle is defined in rule 15, and GCM and GVM are defined in the Act.
Note 2. Subrule (3) (a) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 25 of the Australian Road Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

25–1   NSW rule: drivers to which Part does not apply

(cf RRR, cl 41)

(1)  The provisions of this Part (other than this rule) do not apply to a driver who is taking part in a race, an attempt to break a vehicle speed record, a trial of speed or any competitive trial as referred to in section 40 (1) of the Act in accordance with an approval given, and any conditions imposed by the Commissioner of Police, under section 40 (2) of the Act.
(2)  Nothing in this Part is to be construed so as to justify the driving of any vehicle on a length of road at a speed that:
(a)  having regard to all the circumstances of the case, is dangerous to the public, or
(b)  exceeds any maximum speed applicable to the vehicle that is fixed by or under any Act or statutory rule or that is stated in any notice applicable to the vehicle and displayed in accordance with any law on the road or in a position where it is visible from the road.
(3)  In subrule (2) (a), the circumstances of the case include the following:
(a)  the nature, condition and use of the road,
(b)  the amount of traffic that actually is at the relevant time, or that might reasonably be expected to be, on that road,
(c)  the proximity of any intersection or grades or curves in the road.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

Part 4 Making turns

Division 1 Left turns

26   Application of Division to roundabouts, road related areas and adjacent land

(1)  This Division does not apply to a driver entering or leaving a roundabout.
Note 1. Roundabout is defined in rule 109.
Note 2. Part 9 deals with entering and leaving a roundabout.
(2)  This Division applies to a driver turning left from a road into a road related area or adjacent land, or from a road related area into a road, as if the driver were turning left at an intersection.
Note 1. Adjacent land and intersection are defined in the Dictionary and road related area is defined in rule 13. Adjacent land or a road related area can include a driveway, service station or shopping centre—see the definitions.
Note 2. Rule 74 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road from a road related area or adjacent land, and rule 75 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road related area or adjacent land from a road. Rule 212 deals with a driver entering and leaving a median strip parking area.
Note 3. For the meaning of left, see rule 351 (1).
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. A road related area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule 13.

27   Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)

(1)  A driver turning left at an intersection from a road (except a multi-lane road) must approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable to the far left side of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(1A)  Subrule (1) also applies to a rider of a bicycle who approaches and enters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.
Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
(1B)  Despite subrule (1), if there is space in a bicycle storage area for 2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on the right may approach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to the right side of the other rider, but only if that other rider approaches and enters the intersection in accordance with this rule.
(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note 1. Intersection and multi-lane road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Road related area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule 13.
Example. 

Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)

28   Starting a left turn from a multi-lane road

(1)  A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road must approach and enter the intersection from within the left lane unless:
(a)  the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the intersection from within another marked lane under rule 88 (1), 92 or 159, or
(b)  the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(c)  subrule (1A) or (2) applies to the driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. B lights, intersection, marked lane, multi-lane road, public bus and traffic arrows are defined in the Dictionary, and left lane is defined in subrule (3).
Note 2. Rule 88 (1) deals with left turn only signs, rule 92 deals with traffic lane arrows, and rule 159 deals with traffic signs requiring particular kinds of vehicles to drive in an indicated marked lane.
Note 3. Division 2 of Part 17 provides for priority to be given to public buses at intersections with B lights or a white traffic arrow.
Example for subrule (1) (a). 

Starting a left turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows as required or permitted under rule 92

(1A)  A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road that has a slip lane must approach and enter the intersection:
(a)  from within the slip lane, or
(b)  if there is an obstruction that prevents the driver from entering the intersection from within the slip lane—from within the left lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Obstruction and slip lane are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left lane if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b)  the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle sign, and
(c)  any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point of the intersection, and
(d)  it is not practicable for the driver to turn left from within the left lane, and
(e)  the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely turn left at the intersection by occupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.
Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note 3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
Example. 

Long vehicle turning left from the left lane and next marked lane

(2A)  If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that extends across one or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, a rider of a bicycle turning left must approach and enter the intersection from within the part of the bicycle storage area that is directly in front of the left marked lane or of a bicycle lane that is on the left side of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

left lane means:

(a)  the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road, or
(b)  if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked lane that is not obstructed.

marked lane, for a driver, does not include a special purpose lane in which the driver is not permitted to drive.

Note 1. 

Special purpose lane is defined in the Dictionary.

Note 2. Rule 95 deals with driving in an emergency stopping lane and Part 11, Division 6 deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.

 

Do not overtake turning vehicle signs

Note 1 for diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long vehicles.
Note 2 for diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule 316–1.

29   Making a left turn as indicated by a turn line

(1)  If a driver is turning left at an intersection and there is a turn line indicating how the turn is required to be made, the driver must make the turn as indicated by the turn line unless:
(a)  the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(b)  subrule (2) applies to the driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. B lights, intersection, traffic arrows and turn line are defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Making a left turn as indicated by a turn line

(2)  A driver may turn left at an intersection other than as indicated by a turn line if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b)  the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle sign, and
(c)  it is not practicable for the driver to turn left as indicated by the turn line, and
(d)  the driver can safely turn left other than as indicated by the turn line.
Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note 3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
 

Do not overtake turning vehicle signs

Note 1 for diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long vehicles.
Note 2 for diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule 316–1.

Division 2 Right turns

30   Application of Division to certain right turns

(1)  This Division does not apply to:
(a)  a driver turning right at an intersection where there is a hook turn only sign, or
(b)  the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn under Division 3, or
(c)  a driver making a U-turn, or
(d)  a driver entering or leaving a roundabout.
Note 1. Bicycle, intersection and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary and roundabout is defined in rule 109.
Note 2. Division 3 of this Part deals with hook turns, Division 4 deals with U-turns and Part 9 deals with entering and leaving a roundabout.
Note 3. For the meaning of right, see rule 351 (2).
(2)  This Division applies to a driver turning right from a road into a road related area or adjacent land, or from a road related area into a road, as if the driver were turning right at an intersection.
Note 1. Adjacent land is defined in the Dictionary and road related area is defined in rule 13. Adjacent land or a road related area can include a driveway, service station or shopping centre—see the definitions.
Note 2. Rule 74 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road from a road related area or adjacent land, and rule 75 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road related area or adjacent land from a road. Rule 212 deals with a driver entering and leaving a median strip parking area.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. A road related area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule 13.

31   Starting a right turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)

(1)  A driver turning right at an intersection from a road (except a multi-lane road) must approach and enter the intersection in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection and multi-lane road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the road has a dividing line or median strip, the driver must approach and enter the intersection from the left of, parallel to, and as near as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.
Note. Dividing line and median strip are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If the road does not have a dividing line or median strip and is not a one-way road, the driver must approach and enter the intersection from the left of, parallel to, and as near as practicable to, the centre of the road.
Note. Centre of the road and one-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  If the road is a one-way road, the driver must approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable to the far right side of the road.
(4A)  Subrules (2), (3) and (4) also apply to a rider of a bicycle who approaches and enters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.
Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
(4B)  Despite subrules (2), (3) and (4), if there is space in a bicycle storage area for 2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on the left may approach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to the left side of the other rider, but only if that other rider approaches and enters the intersection in accordance with this rule.
(5)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule 13.
Examples. 

Example 1

Starting a right turn from a road with a dividing line

Example 2

Starting a right turn from a one-way road

32   Starting a right turn from a multi-lane road

(1)  A driver turning right at an intersection from a multi-lane road must approach and enter the intersection from within the right lane unless:
(a)  the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the intersection from within another marked lane in accordance with rule 89 (1), 92 or 159, or
(b)  the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(c)  subrule (2) applies to the driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. B lights, intersection, marked lane, multi-lane road, public bus and traffic arrows are defined in the Dictionary, and right lane is defined in subrule (3).
Note 2. Rule 89 (1) deals with right turn only signs, rule 92 deals with traffic lane arrows, and rule 159 deals with traffic signs requiring particular kinds of vehicles to drive in an indicated marked lane.
Note 3. Division 2 of Part 17 provides for priority to be given to public buses at intersections with B lights or a white traffic arrow.
Example for subrule (1) (a). 

Starting a right turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows as required or permitted under rule 92

(2)  A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b)  the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle sign, and
(c)  any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point of the intersection, and
(d)  it is not practicable for the driver to turn right from within the right lane, and
(e)  the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely turn right at the intersection by occupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.
Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note 3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
(2A)  If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that extends across one or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, a rider of a bicycle turning right (but not making a hook turn) must approach and enter the intersection from within the part of the bicycle storage area that is directly in front of the right marked lane or of a bicycle lane that is on the right side of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

marked lane, for a driver, does not include a special purpose lane in which the driver is not permitted to drive.

right lane means:

(a)  the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on the road, or
(b)  if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked lane that is not obstructed.

Note 1. Dividing line, median strip, obstruction and special purpose lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 95 deals with driving in an emergency stopping lane and Part 11, Division 6 deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.
 

Do not overtake turning vehicle signs

Note 1 for diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long vehicles.
Note 2 for diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule 316–1.

33   Making a right turn

(1)  A driver turning right at an intersection must make the turn in accordance with this rule unless:
(a)  the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(b)  subrule (4) applies to the driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. B lights, intersection and traffic arrows are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If there is a turn line indicating how the turn is required to be made, the driver must make the turn as indicated by the turn line.
Note. Turn line is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If there is no turn line indicating how the turn is required to be made, the driver must make the turn so the driver:
(a)  passes as near as practicable to the right of the centre of the intersection, and
(b)  turns into the left of the centre of the road the driver is entering, unless the driver is entering a one-way road.
Note. Centre of the road is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Making a right turn as indicated by turn lines

Example 2

Making a right turn from a road with no turn lines indicating how to make the turn

(4)  A driver may turn right other than as indicated by a turn line if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b)  the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle sign, and
(c)  it is not practicable for the driver to turn right as indicated by the turn line, and
(d)  the driver can safely make the turn other than as indicated by the turn line.
Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note 3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
 

Do not overtake turning vehicle signs

Note 1 for diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long vehicles.
Note 2 for diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule 316–1.

Division 3 Hook turns at intersections

34   Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign

(1)  A driver turning right at an intersection with traffic lights and a hook turn only sign must turn right by making a hook turn in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  To make a hook turn, the driver must take, in sequence, each of the following steps:
1  Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable to the far left side of the road that the driver is leaving.
2  Move forward, keeping as near as practicable to the left of the intersection and clear of any marked foot crossing, until the driver is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that the driver is entering.
3  Remain at the position reached under step 2 until the traffic lights on the road that the driver is entering change to green.
4  Turn right into that road.
Note. Marked foot crossing is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13.
 

 

Example.

Hook turn only sign

Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign

35   Optional hook turn by a bicycle rider

(1)  The rider of a bicycle turning right at an intersection without a hook turn only sign, or a no hook turn by bicycles sign, may turn right at the intersection by making a right turn under Division 2 or a hook turn under this rule.
Note. Bicycle and intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The rider must make a hook turn under this rule in accordance with subrule (3).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  To make a hook turn under this rule, the rider must take, in sequence, each of the following steps:
1  Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable to the far left side of the road that the rider is leaving.
2  Move forward:
(a)  keeping as near as practicable to the far left side of the intersection, and
(b)  keeping clear of any marked foot crossing, and
(c)  keeping clear, as far as practicable, of any driver turning left from the left of the intersection,
      until the rider is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that the rider is entering.
3  If there are traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the position reached under step 2 until the traffic lights on the road that the rider is entering change to green.
4  If there are no traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the position reached under step 2 until the rider has given way to approaching drivers on the road that the rider is leaving.
5  Turn right into the road that the rider is entering.
Note. Approaching and marked foot crossing is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  To make a hook turn under this rule at an intersection that has a bicycle hook turn storage area on the left side of the intersection as the rider approaches the intersection, the rider must take the following initial 2 steps instead of the initial 2 steps listed in subrule (3):
1  Approach the intersection from the far left side of the road the rider is leaving and enter the intersection by moving into the bicycle hook turn storage area, keeping clear of any marked foot crossing.
2  Move forward in the bicycle hook turn storage area until the rider is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that the rider is entering.
Note. Bicycle hook turn storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Example. 

Bicycle rider making a hook turn at an intersection without traffic lights

36   Bicycle rider making a hook turn contrary to no hook turn by bicycles sign

The rider of a bicycle must not make a hook turn at an intersection that has a no hook turn by bicycles sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle and intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
 

No hook turn by bicycles sign

Division 4 U-turns

Note. U-turn is defined in the Dictionary.

37   Beginning a U-turn

A driver must not begin a U-turn unless:
(a)  the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic, and
(b)  the driver can safely make the U-turn without unreasonably obstructing the free movement of traffic.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Approaching traffic means traffic approaching from any direction—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Traffic is defined in the Dictionary.

38   Giving way when making a U-turn

A driver making a U-turn must give way to all vehicles and pedestrians.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary stop, to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.

39   Making a U-turn contrary to a no U-turn sign

(1)  A driver must not make a U-turn at a break in a dividing strip on a road if there is a no U-turn sign at the break in the dividing strip.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Dividing strip is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (5) and (6) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at a break in a dividing strip.
(2)  A driver must not make a U-turn on a length of road to which a no U-turn sign applies.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A no U-turn sign on a road (except a no U-turn sign at an intersection or at a break in a dividing strip) applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearer of the following:
(a)  the next intersection on the road,
(b)  if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of the road.
Note 1. Intersection and T-intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign on a road.
 

No U-turn signs

No U-turn sign

(Standard sign)

No U-turn sign

(Variable illuminated message sign)

40   Making a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights

A driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights unless there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
 

U-turn permitted sign

41   Making a U-turn at an intersection without traffic lights

A driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection without traffic lights if there is a no U-turn sign at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. U-turns are permitted at intersections without traffic lights unless there is a no U-turn sign, even though traffic lane arrows indicate that the driver must or may turn right—see rule 92.

42   Starting a U-turn at an intersection

A driver making a U-turn at an intersection must start the U-turn:
(a)  if the road where the driver is turning has a dividing line or median strip—from the marked lane nearest, or as near as practicable, to the dividing line or median strip, or
(b)  in any other case—from the left of the centre of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Centre of the road, dividing line, intersection, marked lane and median strip are defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Starting a U-turn on a road with a median strip

43   

Part 5 Change of direction and stop signals

Division 1 Change of direction signals

44   Division does not apply to entering or leaving a roundabout

This Division does not apply to a driver entering, in or leaving a roundabout.
Note. Part 9 deals with giving change of direction signals when entering or leaving a roundabout.

45   What is changing direction

(1)  A driver changes direction if the driver changes direction to the left or the driver changes direction to the right.
(2)  A driver changes direction to the left by doing any of the following:
(a)  turning left,
(b)  changing marked lanes to the left,
(c)  diverging to the left,
(d)  entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the left,
(e)  moving to the left from a stationary position,
(f)  turning left into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a median strip parking area,
(g)  at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the right—leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the terminating road.
Note 1. Marked lane and median strip parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the meaning of left, see rule 351 (1).
(3)  A driver changes direction to the right by doing any of the following:
(a)  turning right,
(b)  changing marked lanes to the right,
(c)  diverging to the right,
(d)  entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the right,
(e)  moving to the right from a stationary position,
(f)  turning right into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a median strip parking area,
(g)  making a U-turn,
(h)  at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the left—leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the terminating road.
Note 1. U-turn is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the meaning of right, see rule 351 (2).
Examples for subrules (2) (g) and (3) (h). 

Example 1

Driver indicating change of direction at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the right and the driver is proceeding straight ahead onto the terminating road

Example 2

Driver indicating change of direction at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the left and the driver is proceeding straight ahead onto the terminating road

46   Giving a left change of direction signal

(1)  Before a driver changes direction to the left, the driver must give a left change of direction signal in accordance with rule 47 for long enough to comply with subrule (2) and, if subrule (3) applies to the driver, that subrule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Changes direction to the left is defined in rule 45 (2).
(2)  The driver must give the change of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.
(3)  If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a stationary position at the side of the road or in a median strip parking area, the driver must give the change of direction signal for at least 5 seconds before the driver changes direction.
Note. Median strip parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon as the driver completes the change of direction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights.
Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.

47   How to give a left change of direction signal

The driver of a vehicle must give a left change of direction signal by operating the vehicle’s left direction indicator lights.

48   Giving a right change of direction signal

(1)  Before a driver changes direction to the right, the driver must give a right change of direction signal in accordance with rule 49 for long enough to comply with subrule (2) and, if subrule (3) applies to the driver, that subrule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Changes direction to the right is defined in rule 45 (3).
(2)  The driver must give the change of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.
(3)  If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a stationary position at the side of the road or in a median strip parking area, the driver must give the change of direction signal for at least 5 seconds before the driver changes direction.
Note. Median strip parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3A)  Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle that is stopped in traffic but not parked.
(4)  The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon as the driver completes the change of direction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  This rule does not apply to:
(a)  the driver of a tram that is not fitted with direction indicator lights, or
(b)  the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn.
Note 1. Bicycle and tram are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rules 34 and 35 deal with bicycles making hook turns.

49   How to give a right change of direction signal

(1)  The driver of a vehicle must give a right change of direction signal by operating the vehicle’s right direction indicator lights.
(2)  However, if the vehicle’s direction indicator lights are not in working order or are not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights, the driver must give the change of direction signal by giving a hand signal in accordance with rule 50, or using a mechanical signalling device fitted to the vehicle.
Note. Mechanical signalling device is defined in the Dictionary.

50   How to give a right change of direction signal by giving a hand signal

To give a hand signal for changing direction to the right, the driver must extend the right arm and hand horizontally and at right angles from the right side of the vehicle, with the hand open and the palm facing the direction of travel.
Example. 

Giving a hand signal for changing direction to the right

51   When use of direction indicator lights permitted

The driver of a vehicle must not operate a direction indicator light except:
(a)  to give a change of direction signal when the driver is required to give the signal under these Rules, or
(b)  as part of the vehicle’s hazard warning lights.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Division 2 Stop signals

52   Division does not apply to bicycle riders or certain tram drivers

This Division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, or the driver of a tram that is not fitted with brake lights.
Note. Bicycle and tram are defined in the Dictionary.

53   Giving a stop signal

(1)  A driver must give a stop signal in accordance with rule 54 before stopping or when suddenly slowing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  If the driver is stopping, the driver must give the stop signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other road users.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  If the driver is slowing suddenly, the driver must give the stop signal while slowing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

54   How to give a stop signal

(1)  The driver of a vehicle must give a stop signal by means of the vehicle’s brake lights.
(2)  However, if the vehicle’s brake lights are not in working order or are not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with brake lights, the driver must give the stop signal by giving a hand signal in accordance with rule 55, or using a mechanical signalling device fitted to the vehicle.
Note. Mechanical signalling device is defined in the Dictionary.

55   How to give a stop signal by giving a hand signal

(1)  To give a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing, the driver must extend the right arm and hand at right angles from the right side of the vehicle, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and hand pointing upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing the direction of travel.
(2)  However, the rider of a motor bike may give the hand signal by extending the left arm and hand at right angles from the left side of the motor bike, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and hand pointing upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing the direction of travel.
Note. Motor bike is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Giving a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing

Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrows and twin red lights

Division 1 Obeying traffic lights and traffic arrows

Note 1. Traffic arrows and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary. Traffic arrows are a traffic control device designed to show a traffic arrow, or 2 or more traffic arrows at different times—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A reference in a rule of this Part to a green, yellow or red traffic light or traffic arrow is a reference to a steady green, yellow or red traffic light or traffic arrow, unless otherwise stated in the rule—see rule 323.
Note 3. The rules dealing with T lights and B lights, which apply to drivers of trams and public buses, are in Part 17.

56   Stopping for a red traffic light or arrow

(1)  A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red traffic light must stop:
(a)  if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line, or
(b)  if there is a stop here on red signal sign at or near the traffic lights, but no stop line—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the sign, or
(c)  if there is no stop line or stop here on red signal sign at or near the traffic lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic lights,
      and must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red signal sign or nearest or only traffic lights (as the case may be) until the traffic lights show a green or flashing yellow traffic light or no traffic light.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Red traffic light and stop line are defined in the Dictionary.
Example for subrule (1) (b). 

Stopping at a stop here on red signal sign on a road the driver is entering

In this example the driver may go straight ahead, or turn right or left, if there is a green traffic light showing at 1. However, the driver must not go beyond the stop here on red signal sign at 2 if there is a red traffic light showing on the road the driver is entering (see 2 and 3).

(1A)  However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on red after stopping sign and the driver is turning left at the intersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.
Note. Rule 62 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver turning left at an intersection after stopping at a left turn on red after stopping sign.
(2)  A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a red traffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must stop:
(a)  if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line, or
(b)  if there is a stop here on red arrow sign at or near the traffic arrows, but no stop line—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the sign, or
(c)  if there is no stop line or stop here on red arrow sign at or near the traffic arrows—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic arrows,
      and must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red arrow sign or nearest or only traffic arrows (as the case may be) until the traffic arrows show a green or flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic arrow.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Red traffic arrow is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This rule only applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane if the red traffic light or red traffic arrow applies to the slip lane—see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially rules 330 and 345.
Note 3. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red traffic light.
Note 4. The driver of a tram or a public bus does not have to stop at traffic lights showing a red traffic light if a white T light (for trams) or a white B light (for public buses) is also showing, or a white traffic arrow is showing and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow—see rules 278 and 285.
 

Stop here on red signal sign

Stop here on red arrow sign

(3)  If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights referred to in subrule (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subrule (1) (a) or (2) (a):
(a)  in the case of a driver of a motor vehicle, is a reference to the first stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching the lights, and
(b)  in the case of a rider of a bicycle, is a reference to the stop line that is nearest to the intersection.
Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.

57   Stopping for a yellow traffic light or arrow

(1)  A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a yellow traffic light must stop:
(a)  if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights and the driver can stop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line, or
(b)  if there is no stop line at or near the traffic lights and the driver can stop safely before reaching the traffic lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic lights, or
(c)  if the traffic lights are at an intersection and the driver cannot stop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can stop safely before entering the intersection—before entering the intersection,
      and must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic lights, or into the intersection (as the case may be), until the traffic lights show a green or flashing yellow traffic light or no traffic light.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Enter, intersection, stop line and yellow traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a yellow traffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must stop:
(a)  if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the driver can stop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line, or
(b)  if there is no stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the driver can stop safely before reaching the traffic arrows—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic arrows, or
(c)  if the traffic arrows are at an intersection and the driver cannot stop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can stop safely before entering the intersection—before entering the intersection,
      and must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic arrows, or into the intersection (as the case may be), until the traffic arrows show a green or flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic arrow.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Enter, intersection, stop line and yellow traffic arrow are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) are at an intersection and the driver is not able to stop safely under subrule (1) or (2) (as the case may be) and enters the intersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as the driver can do so safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection does not include a road related area—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This rule applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane only if the yellow traffic light or yellow traffic arrow (as the case may be) applies to the slip lane—see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially rules 330 and 345.
Note 3. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop at a yellow traffic light.
(4)  If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights referred to in subrule (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subrule (1) (a) or (2) (a):
(a)  in the case of a driver of a motor vehicle, is a reference to the first stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching the lights, and
(b)  in the case of a rider of a bicycle, is a reference to the stop line that is nearest to the intersection.
Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.

58   Exceptions to stopping for a red or yellow traffic light

(1)  A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red or yellow traffic light does not have to stop if a green traffic arrow is also showing and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Note. Green traffic arrow, red traffic light and yellow traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights who approaches or is at a red traffic light on the road that the driver is entering does not have to stop for that traffic light if there is no stop line or stop here on red signal sign at or near the traffic light.
Note. Intersection and stop line are defined in the Dictionary.

59   Proceeding through a red traffic light

(1)  If traffic lights at an intersection or marked foot crossing are showing a red traffic light, a driver must not enter the intersection or marked foot crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Enter, intersection, marked foot crossing and red traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rules 56 and 57 deal with stopping for a red or yellow traffic light, and proceeding while the light remains red or yellow. Rule 60 deals with proceeding through a red traffic arrow.
(2)  However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on red after stopping sign and the driver is turning left at the intersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.
Note. Rule 62 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver turning left at an intersection after stopping at a left turn on red after stopping sign.
(3)  Also, subrule (1) does not apply to a driver if rule 58 (1) applies to the driver.
Note. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red traffic light.
 

Left turn on red after stopping sign

60   Proceeding through a red traffic arrow

If traffic arrows at an intersection or marked foot crossing are showing a red traffic arrow, and a driver is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow, the driver must not enter the intersection or marked foot crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Enter, intersection, marked foot crossing and red traffic arrow are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rules 56 and 57 deal with stopping for a red or yellow traffic arrow.

60A   Proceeding through a bicycle storage area before a red traffic light or arrow

(1)  If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic lights that are showing a red traffic light, a driver of a motor vehicle must not allow any part of the vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle storage area, red traffic light and motor vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic arrows that are showing a red traffic arrow, and a driver of a motor vehicle is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow, the driver must not allow any part of the vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Red traffic arrow is defined in the Dictionary.

61   Proceeding when traffic lights or arrows at an intersection change to yellow or red

(1)  This rule applies to:
(a)  a driver at an intersection with traffic lights showing a green traffic light who has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red signal sign, or nearest or only traffic lights, at the intersection and is not making a hook turn at the intersection, or
(b)  a driver at an intersection with traffic arrows showing a green traffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow and has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red arrow sign, or nearest or only traffic arrows, at the intersection.
Example. A driver may stop after the stop line at an intersection with traffic lights showing a green traffic light, and not proceed through the intersection, because traffic is congested.
Note 1. Green traffic arrow, green traffic light, intersection and stop line are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Hook turns are dealt with in rules 34 and 35.
(2)  If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) change to yellow or red while the driver is stopped and the driver has not entered the intersection, the driver must not enter the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Enter is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on red after stopping sign and the driver is turning left at the intersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.
Note. Rule 62 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver turning left at an intersection after stopping at a left turn on red after stopping sign.
(4)  Also, subrule (2) does not apply to a driver if rule 58 (1) applies to the driver.
Note. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red traffic light.
(5)  If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) change to yellow or red while the driver is stopped and the driver has entered the intersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as the driver can do so safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection does not include a road related area—see the definition in the Dictionary.

Division 2 Giving way at traffic lights and traffic arrows

Note. Traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.

62   Giving way when turning at an intersection with traffic lights

(1)  A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights must give way to:
(a)  any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the road the driver is entering, and
(b)  if the driver is turning left at a left turn on red after stopping sign at the intersection:
(i)  any vehicle approaching from the right, turning right at the intersection into the road the driver is entering or making a U-turn, and
(ii)  any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is on the road the driver is leaving, and
(c)  if the driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except a vehicle turning left using a slip lane).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection, oncoming vehicle, slip lane, straight ahead and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must remain stationary until it is safe to proceed—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at an intersection.
Note 4. A driver turning left at a left turn on red after stopping sign, at an intersection with traffic lights showing a red traffic light, must stop in accordance with rule 56 (1) before making the turn.
Note 5. In relation to paragraph (a), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(2)  However, a driver who is turning at an intersection with traffic arrows showing a green traffic arrow need not give way to an oncoming vehicle if the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the green traffic arrow.
Note. Green traffic arrow is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is entering

Example 2

Driver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle going straight ahead

Example 3

Driver turning right does not have to give way to an oncoming vehicle that is turning left into the road the driver is entering using a slip lane

In example 1, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.

In examples 2 and 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

63   Giving way at an intersection with traffic lights not operating or only partly operating

(1)  This rule applies to a driver at an intersection if traffic lights at the intersection are not operating, or the traffic lights are showing only a flashing yellow traffic light.
Note. Intersection and yellow traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If there is a traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, the driver must comply with rule 67 as if the sign were a stop sign at an intersection without traffic lights.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at an intersection.
Note 2. Rule 67 deals with stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an intersection without traffic lights.
Note 3. There is no requirement under Division 1 of this Part for a driver to stop for a flashing yellow traffic light or traffic lights that are not operating.
(3)  If there is no traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, the driver must give way to vehicles and pedestrians at or near the intersection in accordance with rule 72 or 73 as if the intersection were an intersection without traffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Give way line and stop line are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rules 72 and 73 deal with giving way at an intersection (except a roundabout) without traffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to the driver.
 

Traffic light-stop sign

(4)  Subrule (3) does not apply if the intersection is a roundabout.
Note 1. Roundabout is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 114 requires a driver entering a roundabout to give way to any vehicle in the roundabout and to any tram that is entering or approaching the roundabout.

64   Giving way at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection

A driver turning in the direction indicated by a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection with traffic lights must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle travelling on the road the driver is entering, and
(b)  any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the road the driver is entering, and
(c)  if the driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except a vehicle turning left using a slip lane).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection, oncoming vehicle, slip lane, straight ahead and yellow traffic arrow are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. There is no requirement under Division 1 of this Part for a driver to stop for a flashing yellow traffic arrow.
Note 4. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.

65   Giving way at a marked foot crossing (except at an intersection) with a flashing yellow traffic light

(1)  This rule applies to a driver approaching or at a marked foot crossing (except at or near an intersection) with a flashing yellow traffic light at the crossing.
Note. Intersection, marked foot crossing and yellow traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The driver must:
(a)  give way to any pedestrian on the crossing, and
(b)  not obstruct any pedestrian on the crossing, and
(c)  not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same direction as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give way at the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Overtake is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For subrule (2), give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(3)  If there is no pedestrian on the crossing, and no other vehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver that is stopping, or has stopped, to give way at the crossing, the driver may proceed through the crossing.

Division 3 Twin red lights (except at level crossings)

66   Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossings)

(1)  A driver approaching or at twin red lights on a road (except at a level crossing) must stop in accordance with subrules (2) and (3).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Level crossing is defined in rule 120, and twin red lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device on a road.
Note 3. Twin red lights are generally erected at bridges, ambulance stations, fire stations or level crossings. The rules about stopping at level crossings are in Part 10.
(2)  If there is a stop line at or near the lights and the driver can stop safely before reaching the stop line, the driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line.
Note. Stop line is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If there is no stop line at or near the lights and the driver can stop safely before reaching the lights, the driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the lights.
(4)  If the driver stops for the lights, the driver must not proceed until the lights are not showing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Part 7 Giving way

Note 1. The rules in this Part deal with giving way in most situations. In addition, other rules requiring a driver to give way include:
•  making a U-turn—rule 38
•  turning at traffic lights at an intersection—rule 62
•  at an intersection with traffic lights that are not operating or only partly operating—rule 63
•  turning at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an intersection—rule 64
•  at a marked foot crossing with a flashing yellow traffic light—rule 65
•  entering and driving in a roundabout—rule 114
•  by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle leaving a roundabout—rule 119
•  at a stop sign at a level crossing—rule 121
•  at a give way sign or give way line at a level crossing—rule 122
•  moving from one marked lane to another marked lane, or from one line of traffic to another line of traffic—rule 148
•  when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic—rule 149
•  for pedestrians crossing the road near a stopped tram—rules 163, 164 and 164A.
Note 2. For the meaning of left and right, see rule 351 (1) and (2).

Division 1 Giving way at a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to the driver

Note. For a driver, a reference in a rule in this Division to a traffic sign or road marking is a reference to a traffic sign or road marking applying to the driver—see rules 338 to 341.

67   Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an intersection without traffic lights

(1)  A driver at an intersection with a stop sign or stop line, but without traffic lights, must stop and give way in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection and stop line are defined in the Dictionary. This rule applies also to T-intersections—see the definition of intersection.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must remain stationary until it is safe for the driver to proceed—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. Part 6 deals with stopping and giving way at an intersection with traffic lights.
Note 4. This rule only applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane if the stop sign or stop line applies to the slip lane—see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially rules 330 and 345.
(2)  The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching:
(a)  the stop line, or
(b)  if there is no stop line—the intersection.
(3)  The driver must give way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching the intersection except:
(a)  an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the oncoming vehicle, or
(b)  a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane, or
(c)  a vehicle making a U-turn.
Note. Enter, give way line, oncoming vehicle, slip lane and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the driver must also give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.
Note. Rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(5)  For this rule, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a T-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be turning.
 

Stop sign

Examples. 

Example 1

Stop line

Example 2

Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to vehicles on the left and right

In example 2, vehicle B must stop and give way to each vehicle A.

Example 3

Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to an oncoming vehicle at a stop sign

Example 4

Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to an oncoming vehicle that is not at a stop sign or give way sign

In examples 3 and 4, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle A.

68   Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at other places

(1)  A driver approaching or at a place with a stop sign or stop line must stop and give way in accordance with this rule, unless the place is:
(a)  an intersection, or
(b)  a children’s crossing, or
(c)  an area of a road that is not a children’s crossing only because it does not have:
(i)  children crossing flags, or
(ii)  children’s crossing signs and twin yellow lights, or
(d)  a level crossing, or
(e)  a place with twin red lights.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Examples. 

1   A stop sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the part of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles from a service road.

2   A stop sign on an exit from a carpark where the exit joins the road.

Note 1. Children’s crossing is defined in rule 80, intersection, stop line and twin red lights are defined in the Dictionary, and level crossing is defined in rule 120.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must remain stationary until it is safe for the driver to proceed—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. For the stopping and giving way rules applying to a driver at an intersection or level crossing with a stop sign or stop line, see rule 67 (intersections) and rule 121 (level crossings). Rule 80 deals with stopping at a stop line at a children’s crossing.
(2)  The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching:
(a)  the stop line, or
(b)  if there is no stop line—the stop sign.
(3)  The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the stop line or stop sign.
Examples. 

Example 1

Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a break in a dividing strip

Example 2

Stopping and giving way at a stop sign where a carpark exit joins a road

In each example, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle A.

69   Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at an intersection (except a roundabout)

(1)  A driver at an intersection (except a roundabout) with a give way sign or give way line must give way in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Give way line and intersection are defined in the Dictionary, and roundabout is defined in rule 109. This rule also applies to T-intersections—see the definition of intersection.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  Unless the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching the intersection except:
(a)  an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the oncoming vehicle, or
(b)  a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane, or
(c)  a vehicle making a U-turn.
Note. Enter, oncoming vehicle, slip lane, stop line and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
(2A)  If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle on the road the driver is entering, or turning right at the intersection into the road the driver is entering (except a vehicle making a U-turn at the intersection), and
(b)  any other vehicle or pedestrian on the slip lane.
(3)  If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the driver must also give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.
Note. Rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(4)  For this rule, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a T-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be turning.
 

Give way sign

Examples. 

Example 1

Give way line

Example 2

Giving way at a give way sign to vehicles on the left and right

In example 2, vehicle B must give way to each vehicle A.

Example 3

Giving way at a give way sign to an oncoming vehicle at a give way sign

Example 4

Giving way at a give way sign to an oncoming vehicle that is not at a stop sign or give way sign

In examples 3 and 4, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

Example 5

Driver turning right at a give way line does not have to give way to a vehicle turning left using a slip lane

In example 5, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

70   Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or length of narrow road

A driver approaching a bridge or length of narrow road with a give way sign must give way to any oncoming vehicle that is on the bridge or length of road when the driver reaches the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Oncoming vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Giving way at a bridge

Example 2

Giving way at a length of narrow road

In each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

71   Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at other places

(1)  A driver approaching or at a place (except an intersection, bridge or length of narrow road, level crossing, or a place with twin red lights) with a give way sign or give way line must give way in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Examples. 

1   A give way sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the part of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles from a service road.

2   A give way sign on a road at a place where a bicycle path meets the road.

Note 1. Give way line, intersection and twin red lights are defined in the Dictionary, and level crossing is defined in rule 120.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. For the give way rules applying to a driver at an intersection, bridge or length of narrow road, or level crossing, with a give way sign or give way line, see rule 69 (intersections), rule 70 (bridges and lengths of narrow road) and rule 122 (level crossings).
(2)  The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the give way sign or give way line.
Examples. 

Example 1

Giving way at a give way sign at a break in a dividing strip

Example 2

Giving way at a give way sign where a bicycle path meets a road

In example 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

In example 2, the motor vehicle must give way to the bicycle.

Division 2 Giving way at an intersection without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to the driver

Note. For a driver, a reference in a rule in this Division to a traffic sign or road marking is a reference to a traffic sign or road marking applying to the driver—see rules 338 to 341.

72   Giving way at an intersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout)

(1)  A driver at an intersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout) without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, must give way in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Give way line, intersection, stop line, T-intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary, and roundabout is defined in rule 109.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the driver is going straight ahead, the driver must give way to any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the approaching vehicle.
Examples. 

Example 1

Driver going straight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the right that is going straight ahead

Example 2

Driver going straight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the right that is turning right

In each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

Note. Straight ahead is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane), the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the approaching vehicle, and
(b)  any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the road the driver is entering.
Examples. 

Example 3

Driver turning left giving way to a vehicle on the right that is going straight ahead

Example 4

Driver turning left giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is entering

In example 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

In example 4, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.

Note 1. Slip lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(4)  If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle approaching from the right or turning right at the intersection into the road the driver is entering (except a vehicle making a U-turn at the intersection), and
(b)  any pedestrian on the slip lane.
Example. 

Example 5

Driver turning left using a slip lane giving way to a vehicle that is turning right into the road the driver is entering

In this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

(5)  If the driver is turning right, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the approaching vehicle, and
(b)  any oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turning left at the intersection, unless:
(i)  a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the oncoming vehicle, or
(ii)  the oncoming vehicle is turning left using a slip lane, and
(c)  any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the road the driver is entering.
Note 1. Oncoming vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. In relation to paragraph (c), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
Examples. 

Example 6

Driver turning right giving way to a vehicle on the right that is turning right into the road the driver is leaving

Example 7

Driver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead on the road the driver is leaving

In examples 6 and 7, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

Example 8

Driver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is turning left into the road the driver is entering

Example 9

Driver turning right giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is entering

In example 8, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

In example 9, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.

73   Giving way at a T-intersection

(1)  A driver at a T-intersection without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, must give way in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Give way line, stop line, T-intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. Rule 75 (1) (d) requires a driver at a T-intersection to give way when crossing the continuing road to enter a road related area or adjacent land.
(2)  If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) or right from the terminating road into the continuing road, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle making a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection), and
(b)  any pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road at or near the intersection.
Note 1. Continuing road, slip lane and terminating road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
Examples. 

Example 1

Driver turning right from the terminating road giving way to a vehicle on the continuing road

Example 2

Driver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from the terminating road giving way to a pedestrian on the continuing road

In example 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

In example 2, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.

(3)  If the driver is turning left from the terminating road into the continuing road using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle making a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection), and
(b)  any pedestrian on the slip lane.
(4)  If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from the continuing road into the terminating road, the driver must give way to any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or near the intersection.
Example. 

Example 3

Driver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from the continuing road giving way to a pedestrian on the terminating road

In this example, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.

Note. Rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(5)  If the driver is turning from the continuing road into the terminating road using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle approaching from the right (except a vehicle making a U-turn from the terminating road at the T-intersection), and
(b)  any pedestrian on the slip lane.
(6)  If the driver is turning right from the continuing road into the terminating road, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any oncoming vehicle that is travelling through the intersection on the continuing road or turning left at the intersection, and
(b)  any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or near the intersection.
Note 1. Oncoming vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(7)  In this rule:

turning left from the continuing road into the terminating road, for a driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the right at a T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the terminating road.

turning right from the continuing road into the terminating road, for a driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the left at a T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the terminating road.

Note. Straight ahead is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 4

Driver turning right from the continuing road giving way to an oncoming vehicle travelling through the intersection on the continuing road

Example 5

Driver leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead on the terminating road giving way to a vehicle travelling through the intersection on the continuing road

Example 5 shows a T-intersection where the continuing road (which is marked with broken white lines) goes around a corner. Vehicle B is leaving the continuing road to enter the terminating road. In examples 4 and 5, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

Example 6

Driver turning right from the continuing road giving way to an oncoming vehicle turning left from the continuing road

Example 7

Driver turning right from the continuing road giving way to a pedestrian on the terminating road

In example 6, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

In example 7, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.

Division 3 Entering or leaving road related areas and adjacent land

74   Giving way when entering a road from a road related area or adjacent land

(1)  A driver entering a road from a road related area, or adjacent land, without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle travelling on the road or turning into the road (except a vehicle turning right into the road from a road related area or adjacent land), and
(b)  any pedestrian on the road, and
(c)  any vehicle or pedestrian on any road related area that the driver crosses to enter the road, and
(d)  for a driver entering the road from a road related area:
(i)  any pedestrian on the road related area, and
(ii)  any other vehicle ahead of the driver’s vehicle or approaching from the left or right.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Adjacent land, give way line, stop line and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary, and road related area is defined in rule 13.
Note 2. Adjacent land or a road related area can include a driveway, service station or shopping centre—see the definitions of adjacent land and road related area. Some shopping centres may include roads—see the definition of road in rule 12.
Note 3. Part 6 applies to the driver if there are traffic lights. Rule 68 applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71 applies to the driver if there is a give way sign or give way line.
Note 4. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. A road related area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule 13.
Example. 

Driver entering a road from a road related area giving way to a pedestrian on the footpath and a vehicle on the road

In this example, vehicle B must give way to the pedestrian on the footpath and to vehicle A.

75   Giving way when entering a road related area or adjacent land from a road

(1)  A driver entering a road related area or adjacent land from a place on a road without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line must give way to:
(a)  any pedestrian on the road, and
(b)  any vehicle or pedestrian on any road related area that the driver crosses or enters, and
(c)  if the driver is turning right from the road—any oncoming vehicle on the road that is going straight ahead or turning left, and
(d)  if the road the driver is leaving ends at a T-intersection opposite the road related area or adjacent land and the driver is crossing the continuing road—any vehicle on the continuing road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Adjacent land, continuing road, give way line, oncoming vehicle, stop line, straight ahead, T-intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary, and road related area is defined in rule 13.
Note 2. Adjacent land or a road related area can include a driveway, service station or shopping centre—see the definitions of adjacent land and road related area. Some shopping centres may include roads—see the definition of road in rule 12.
Note 3. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 4. Part 6 applies to the driver if there are traffic lights. Rule 68 applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71 applies to the driver if there is a give way sign or give way line.
(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. A road related area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule 13.
Examples. 

Example 1

Driver turning right from a road into a road related area giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead and to a pedestrian on the footpath

Example 2

Driver crossing a continuing road at a T-intersection to enter a road related area giving way to a vehicle on the continuing road

In each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. In example 1, vehicle B must also give way to the pedestrian on the footpath.

Division 4 Keeping clear of and giving way to particular vehicles

76   Keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes etc

(1)  A driver must not move into the path of an approaching tram travelling in a tram lane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side of the tracks by a broken or continuous yellow line parallel to the tracks.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Approaching, left, tram and tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary, and tram lane is defined in rule 155.
(2)  If a driver is in the path of an approaching tram travelling in a tram lane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side of the tracks by a broken or continuous yellow line parallel to the tracks, the driver must move out of the path of the tram as soon as the driver can do so safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

Note. Bus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.

77   Giving way to buses

(1)  A driver driving on a length of road in a built-up area, in the left lane or left line of traffic, or in a bicycle lane on the far left side of the road, must give way to a bus in front of the driver if:
(a)  the bus has stopped, or is moving slowly, at the far left side of the road, on a shoulder of the road, or in a bus-stop bay, and
(b)  the bus displays a give way to buses sign and the right direction indicator lights of the bus are operating, and
(c)  the bus is about to enter or proceed in the lane or line of traffic in which the driver is driving.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Built-up area, bus and length of road are defined in the Dictionary, left lane and left line of traffic are defined in subrule (2), and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. The driver of the bus must give the change of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians—see rule 48 (2) and (3).
Note 4. Under rule 87 (1), a driver entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from the side of the road must give way to any vehicle travelling in the lane or line of traffic. However, the driver of a public bus does not have to give way to a vehicle if the vehicle is required to give way to the bus under this rule and it is safe for the bus to enter the lane, or line of traffic, in which the other vehicle is travelling—see rule 87 (2).
(2)  In this rule:

left lane, of a road, means:

(a)  the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road (the first lane) or, if the first lane is a bicycle lane, the marked lane next to the first lane, or
(b)  if there is an obstruction in the first lane (for example, a parked car or roadworks) and the first lane is not a bicycle lane—the marked lane next to the first lane.

left line of traffic, for a road, means the line of traffic nearest to the far left side of the road.

Note. Marked lane and obstruction are defined in the Dictionary, and bicycle lane is defined in rule 153.
 

Give way to buses sign

Note 1 for diagram. This sign is displayed on buses.
Note 2 for diagram. This sign must comply with the size requirements set out in rule 316–1.

78   Keeping clear of police and emergency vehicles

(1)  A driver must not move into the path of an approaching police or emergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Approaching, emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If a driver is in the path of an approaching police or emergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm, the driver must move out of the path of the vehicle as soon as the driver can do so safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  This rule applies to the driver despite any other rule of these Rules.

79   Giving way to police and emergency vehicles

(1)  A driver must give way to a police or emergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means:
(a)  if the driver is stopped—remain stationary until it is safe to proceed, or
(b)  in any other case—slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision,
      —see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  This rule applies to the driver despite any other rule of these Rules that would otherwise require the driver of a police or emergency vehicle to give way to the driver.

79–1   NSW rule: interfering or interrupting funeral cortege or authorised procession

(cf RRR, cl 84)

A driver must not interfere with, or interrupt, the free passage along any length of road of:
(a)  any funeral cortege or authorised procession, or
(b)  any vehicle or person apparently forming part of the cortege or procession.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

79–2   NSW rule: precedence at ferries, punts, bridges or railway crossings

(cf RRR, cl 85)

(1)  A driver must on arrival at any ferry, punt, bridge or railway crossing at which the driver is required to wait:
(a)  keep the driver’s vehicle as near as practicable to that boundary of the carriageway of the road that is on the driver's left, and at the end of the line of vehicles waiting to proceed on board the ferry or punt or over the bridge or railway crossing, and
(b)  not break out of that line to take precedence of any vehicle that from its position had a prior right to proceed on board the ferry or punt or over the bridge or railway crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Carriageway and driver’s vehicle are defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.
(2)  However, subrule (1) does not apply to a driver at a ferry or punt if:
(a)  an authorised person has given permission under this rule for the driver’s vehicle to break out of the line and take precedence of any vehicle that had a prior right to proceed on board the ferry or punt, and
(b)  the driver complies with any directions given by the authorised person as to the order or position in which the driver’s vehicle is to be placed and in which it may proceed to board the ferry or punt.
Note. Authorised person is defined in subrule (4).
(3)  An authorised person may give permission for a driver to break out of line and take precedence of any vehicle that had a prior right to proceed on board a ferry or punt, in accordance with the directions of the authorised person, if the authorised person considers that an emergency or all the circumstances of the case make it necessary or appropriate for the driver to be given precedence.
Note. Precedence might, for example, be given to the driver of an ambulance proceeding to or from an accident, or to a fire fighter or police officer proceeding to an emergency or a bus being used to provide a regular bus service.
(4)  In this rule:

authorised person means a police officer or, if no police officer is present, the person in charge of the ferry or punt concerned.

driver does not include a rider of a bicycle.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

Division 5 Crossings and shared zones

80   Stopping at a children’s crossing

(1)  A driver approaching a children’s crossing must drive at a speed at which the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Children’s crossing is defined in subrule (6).
(2)  A driver approaching or at a children’s crossing must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line at the crossing if:
(a)  a hand-held stop sign is displayed at the crossing, or
(b)  a pedestrian is on or entering the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Stop line is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic control device at a place.
(3)  If a driver stops at a children’s crossing for a hand-held stop sign, the driver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian on or entering the crossing and the holder of the sign:
(a)  no longer displays the sign towards the driver, or
(b)  otherwise indicates that the driver may proceed.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  If a driver stops at a children’s crossing for a pedestrian, the driver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian on or entering the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  For this rule, if a children’s crossing extends across a road with a dividing strip, the part of the children’s crossing on each side of the dividing strip is taken to be a separate children’s crossing.
Note. Dividing strip is defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  A children’s crossing is an area of a road:
(a)  at a place with stop lines marked on the road, and:
(i)  children crossing flags, or
(ii)  children’s crossing signs and twin yellow lights, and
(b)  indicated by:
(i)  2 red and white posts erected on each side of the road, or
(ii)  2 parallel continuous or broken lines on the road surface from one side of the road completely or partly across the road, and
(c)  extending across the road between the posts or lines.
Note. Twin yellow lights is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Children crossing flag

Hand-held stop signs

Example. 

Driver stopped at stop line for pedestrians on a children’s crossing with children crossing flags

In this example, the driver must stop at the stop line because there are pedestrians on the children’s crossing.

Note. Example 2 in rule 80 of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced because it is not relevant to this jurisdiction.

81   Giving way at a pedestrian crossing

(1)  A driver approaching a pedestrian crossing must drive at a speed at which the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Pedestrian crossing is defined in subrule (3).
(2)  A driver must give way to any pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(3)  A pedestrian crossing is an area of a road:
(a)  at a place with white stripes on the road surface that:
(i)  run lengthwise along the road, and
(ii)  are of approximately the same length, and
(iii)  are approximately parallel to each other, and
(iv)  are in a row that extends completely, or partly, across the road, and
(b)  with or without either or both of the following:
(i)  a pedestrian crossing sign,
(ii)  alternating flashing twin yellow lights.
Note 1. Twin yellow lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at a place.
 

Pedestrian crossing sign

Examples. 

Example 1

Giving way to a pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing

Example 2

Giving way to a pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing at a slip lane

In each of these examples, the driver must give way to the pedestrian on the crossing.

82   Overtaking or passing a vehicle at a children’s crossing or pedestrian crossing

A driver approaching a children’s crossing, or pedestrian crossing, must not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same direction as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give way to a pedestrian at the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Children’s crossing is defined in rule 80, overtake is defined in the Dictionary, and pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.
Example. 

Driver not passing a vehicle that has stopped to give way to a pedestrian at a pedestrian crossing

In the example, vehicle A has stopped to give way to a pedestrian on the crossing. Vehicle B must not overtake or pass vehicle A.

83   Giving way to pedestrians in a shared zone

A driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian in the zone.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Shared zone is defined in rule 24.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.

Division 6 Other give way rules

84   Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip

(1)  If a driver drives through a break in a dividing strip that has no stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, the driver must give way to:
(a)  any tram on the dividing strip, and
(b)  any vehicle travelling on the part of the road the driver is entering (except a vehicle to which a stop sign, stop line, give way sign, or give way line, applies).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Dividing strip, give way line, stop line and tram are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 68 applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71 applies to the driver if there is a give way sign or give way line.
Note 3. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

Note. Bus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Giving way when driving through a break in a median strip

Example 2

Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip to leave a service road

Example 3

Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip to enter a service road

In each of the examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

Note to examples. A median strip is a particular kind of dividing strip—see the definition of median strip in the Dictionary.

85   Giving way on a painted island

A driver entering a turning lane from a painted island must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle in the turning lane, or
(b)  if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the far left side of the road—any vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane, or line of traffic, immediately to the right of the turning lane, or
(c)  if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the dividing line or median strip on the road or the far right side of the road—any vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane, or line of traffic, immediately to the left of the turning lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Line of traffic, marked lane, painted island and turning lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rules 138 and 139 (4) allow a driver to drive on a painted island in certain circumstances.
Note 3. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Driver entering a turning lane from a painted island giving way to a vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane immediately to the right of the turning lane.

Example 2

Driver entering a turning lane from a painted island giving way to a vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane immediately to the left of the turning lane.

In the examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

86   Giving way in median turning bays

(1)  A driver entering a median turning bay must give way to any oncoming vehicle already in the turning bay.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Oncoming vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

median turning bay means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:

(a)  to which a median turning lane sign applies, or
(b)  where traffic lane arrows applying to the lane indicate that vehicles travelling in opposite directions must turn right.

Note. Marked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in the Dictionary.
 

Median turning lane sign

Example. 

Giving way in a median turning bay

In the example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

87   Giving way when moving from a side of a road or a median strip parking area

(1)  A driver entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from the far left or right side of a road must give way to any vehicle travelling in the lane or line of traffic.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Line of traffic and marked lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For subrule (1), give way means:
(a)  if the driver is stopped—remain stationary until it is safe to proceed, or
(b)  in any other case—slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision,
      —see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  However, the driver of a public bus does not have to give way to a vehicle if:
(a)  the driver of the vehicle is required to give way to the bus under rule 77, and
(b)  it is safe for the bus to enter the lane or line of traffic in which the vehicle is driving.
Note 1. Public bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The bus must display a give way to buses sign and the right direction indicator lights of the bus must be operating—see rule 77.
(3)  A driver turning from a median strip parking area into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in the lane or line of traffic.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Median strip parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For subrule (3), give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(4)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13 and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

Part 8 Traffic signs and road markings

Note 1. The rules in this Part cover most traffic signs and road markings. However, some traffic signs and road markings are dealt with in other Parts dealing with particular subjects. These include:
•  speed limits (including speed limits in speed limited areas and shared zones)—see Part 3
•  U-turns—see Part 4, Division 4
•  traffic lights—see Part 6
•  stop signs and give way signs—see Part 7, Division 1
•  roundabouts—see Part 9
•  level crossings—see Part 10
•  keeping left and lane signs—see Part 11
•  stopping and parking—see Part 12
•  pedestrians—see Part 14
•  bicycle riders—see Part 15.
Note 2. Rule 322 deals with the meaning of traffic control devices on a road or in or at an area or place (including an intersection).
Note 3. For a driver, a traffic sign or road marking mentioned in a rule is, unless the contrary intention appears, a sign or marking that applies to the driver. To find out how traffic signs and road markings apply to a driver, see rules 338 to 341.

Division 1 Traffic signs and road markings at intersections and other places

Note. Intersection, road marking and traffic sign are defined in the Dictionary.

88   Left turn signs

(1)  If there is a left turn only sign at an intersection, a driver must turn left at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. For the meaning of left, see rule 351 (1).
(2)  If there is a left lane must turn left sign at an intersection, a driver who is in the left marked lane when entering the intersection must turn left at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Left turn only sign

Left lane must turn left sign

89   Right turn signs

(1)  If there is a right turn only sign at an intersection, a driver must turn right at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. For the meaning of right, see rule 351 (2).
(2)  If there is a right lane must turn right sign at an intersection, a driver who is in the right marked lane when entering the intersection must turn right at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

turn right does not include make a U-turn.

Note. U-turn is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Right turn only sign

Right lane must turn right sign

90   No turns signs

If there is a no turns sign at an intersection, a driver must not turn left or right, or make a U-turn, at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. U-turn is defined in the Dictionary.
 

No turns sign

91   No left turn and no right turn signs

(1)  If there is a no left turn sign at an intersection, or another place on a road, a driver must not turn left at the intersection or place.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  If there is a no right turn sign at an intersection, or another place on a road, a driver must not turn right or make a U-turn at the intersection or place.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  However, a driver may make a U-turn at the intersection or place if there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection or place.
 

No left turn signs

No left turn sign

(Standard sign)

No left turn sign

(Variable illuminated message sign)

No right turn signs

No right turn sign

(Standard sign)

No right turn sign

(Variable illuminated message sign)

92   Traffic lane arrows

(1)  If a driver is driving in a marked lane at an intersection (except a roundabout) and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the driver must:
(a)  if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in that direction, or
(b)  if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in one of those directions.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Marked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 9 deals with traffic lane arrows at roundabouts.
Note 3. Rule 329 explains when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.
(2)  However, this rule does not apply to a driver if:
(a)  the arrows indicate a direction to the right (whether or not they also indicate another direction) at an intersection and the driver is making a U-turn at the intersection, or
(b)  a traffic sign indicates that the driver may drive in a direction different to that indicated by the traffic lane arrows, or
(c)  the driver is driving in the direction indicated by traffic lane arrows that apply to 1 or more marked lanes and there is an obstruction in each of those lanes, or
(d)  the driver is turning at an intersection in accordance with rule 28 (2) or 32 (2).
Note 1. Obstruction and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rules 40 and 41 deal with making a U-turn at an intersection. If there are traffic lights at the intersection, the driver may make a U-turn only if there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection. If there are no traffic lights at the intersection, the driver may make a U-turn unless there is a no U-turn sign at the intersection.
Note 3. Rule 28 (2) deals with vehicles 7.5 metres long or longer turning left at an intersection from within the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left lane on a multi-lane road. Rule 32 (2) deals with vehicles 7.5 metres long or longer turning right at an intersection from within the marked lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane on a multi-lane road.
Examples. 

Example 1

Traffic lane arrows on the surface of marked lanes

Example 2

Traffic lane arrows on a traffic sign

(3)  The existence of a bicycle storage area in a marked lane does not alter a driver’s obligation to comply with this rule.
Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.

Division 2 Traffic signs and road markings generally

93   No overtaking or passing signs

(1)  A driver must not:
(a)  drive past a no overtaking or passing sign if any oncoming vehicle is on the bridge or length of road to which the sign applies, or
(b)  overtake a vehicle on a bridge or length of road to which a no overtaking or passing sign applies.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Oncoming vehicle and overtake are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A no overtaking or passing sign on a road applies to the length of road (including a length of road on a bridge) beginning at the sign and ending:
(a)  if information on or with the sign indicates a distance—at that distance past the sign, or
(b)  if the sign applies to a bridge—at the end of the bridge, or
(c)  at an end no overtaking or passing sign on the road.
Note. With is defined in the Dictionary.
 

No overtaking or passing sign

End no overtaking or passing sign

94   No overtaking on bridge signs

A driver on a bridge with a no overtaking on bridge sign must not overtake a vehicle between the sign and the far end of the bridge.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Overtake is defined in the Dictionary.
 

No overtaking on bridge sign

95   Emergency stopping lane only signs

(1)  A driver must not drive in an emergency stopping lane unless:
(a)  the driver needs to drive in the emergency stopping lane to avoid a collision, to stop in the lane, or because the driver’s vehicle is disabled, or
(b)  the driver is driving a police or emergency vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle, emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 178 deals with stopping in an emergency stopping lane.
Note 3. Subrule (1) (b) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 95 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a driver to drive in an emergency stopping lane. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a bicycle.
Note 1. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. If a no bicycles sign applies to the emergency stopping lane, the rider must not ride in the lane—see rule 252.
(3)  In this rule:

emergency stopping lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane, to which an emergency stopping lane only sign applies.

Note 1. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 329 explains when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.
 

Emergency stopping lane only sign

Note for diagram. The sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction—see rule 316 (4).

96   Keep clear markings

(1)  A driver must not stop on an area of a road marked with a keep clear marking.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  In this rule:

keep clear marking means the words “keep clear” marked across all or part of a road, with or without continuous lines marked across all or part of the road.

Examples. 

Example 1

Keep clear marking bounded by line road markings

Example 2

Keep clear marking with no line road markings

97   Road access signs

(1)  A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a road access sign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that the driver or the driver’s vehicle is not permitted beyond the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle, length of road and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A road access sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning at the sign (including any road into which the length of road merges) and ending:
(a)  if the sign is on a freeway—at an end freeway sign or end road access sign on the road, or
(b)  if the sign is not on a freeway—at the nearer of the following:
(i)  if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of the road,
(ii)  an end road access sign on the road.
Example. A road access sign on an access ramp to a freeway applies to the access ramp and the freeway into which the access ramp merges.
Note 1. Freeway is defined in rule 177, and road marking, T-intersection and traffic sign are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 229 applies the road access sign to pedestrians.
 

Road access sign

End freeway sign

End road access sign

Note 1 for diagrams. There is another permitted version of the end freeway sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. A road access sign may indicate that it applies to different or additional vehicles or persons—see rule 316 (4).

98   One-way signs

(1)  A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a one-way sign applies except in the direction indicated by the arrow on the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Length of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A one-way sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearer of the following:
(a)  a two-way sign on the road,
(b)  a keep left sign on the road,
(c)  another sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the road is a two-way road,
(d)  if the road ends at a T-intersection—the end of the road.
Note 1. Road marking, T-intersection and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. There is a diagram of a keep left sign in rule 99.
(3)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a postal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the rider:
(a)  is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path adjacent to the length of road, and
(b)  is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or shared path under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction.
Note. Bicycle, footpath, motor bike, nature strip and postal vehicle are defined in the Dictionary and shared path is defined in rule 242.
 

One-way sign

Two-way sign

Note 1 for diagrams. There is another permitted version of the two-way sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. A one-way sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction—see rule 316 (4).

99   Keep left and keep right signs

(1)  A driver driving past a keep left sign must drive to the left of the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A driver driving past a keep right sign must drive to the right of the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a postal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the rider:
(a)  is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path, and
(b)  is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or shared path under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction.
Note. Bicycle, footpath, motor bike, nature strip and postal vehicle are defined in the Dictionary and shared path is defined in rule 242.
 

Keep left sign

Keep right sign

100   No entry signs

A driver must not drive past a no entry sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

 

No entry sign

101   Hand-held stop signs

(1)  A driver approaching a hand-held stop sign must stop before reaching the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  The driver must not proceed until the holder of the sign:
(a)  no longer displays the sign towards the driver, or
(b)  otherwise indicates that the driver may proceed.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  This rule does not apply to a driver approaching or at a hand-held stop sign at a children’s crossing.
Note. Rule 80 defines children’s crossing, and deals with hand-held stop signs at children’s crossings.
 

Hand-held stop signs

101A   Safety ramp and arrester bed signs

(1)  A driver must not drive on a safety ramp or arrester bed unless:
(a)  it is necessary for the driver to do so in the interests of safety, or
(b)  the driver is permitted to do so under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  In this rule:

arrester bed means an area to which an arrester bed sign applies.

safety ramp means an area to which a safety ramp sign applies.

 

Arrester bed sign

Safety ramp sign

Division 3 Signs for trucks, buses and other large vehicles

102   Clearance and low clearance signs

(1)  A driver must not drive past a clearance sign, or a low clearance sign, if the driver’s vehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is higher than the height (in metres) indicated by the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

vehicle includes any load carried by the vehicle.

 

Clearance sign

Low clearance sign

103   Load limit signs

(1)  A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (gross mass) sign or gross load limit sign if the total of the gross mass (in tonnes) of the driver’s vehicle, and any vehicle connected to it, is more than the gross mass indicated by the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (mass per axle group) sign if the mass (in tonnes) carried by an axle group of the driver’s vehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is more than the mass indicated by the sign for the axle group.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  In this rule:

vehicle includes any load carried by the vehicle.

 

Bridge load limit (gross mass) sign

Gross load limit sign

Bridge load limit (mass per axle group) sign

104   No trucks signs

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no trucks sign that has information on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM of the driver’s vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a combination, any vehicle in the combination) is more than that mass, unless the driver is permitted to drive the vehicle on a route passing the sign under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus, combination, driver’s vehicle and with are defined in the Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the Act.
(2)  A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no trucks sign that has information on or with it indicating a length if the length of the driver’s vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a combination, the length of the combination) is longer than that length, unless the driver is permitted to drive the vehicle on a route passing the sign under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  The driver of a truck must not drive past a no trucks sign that has no information on or with it indicating a mass or length, unless the driver is permitted to drive the truck on a route passing the sign under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Truck is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  This rule does not apply to a driver if the destination of the driver lies beyond a no trucks sign and:
(a)  there is no other route by which the driver’s vehicle could reach that destination, or
(b)  any other route by which the driver’s vehicle could reach that destination would require the vehicle to pass another no trucks sign.
 

No trucks sign

105   Trucks must enter signs

If the driver of a truck drives past a trucks must enter sign, the driver must enter the area indicated by information on or with the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Truck and with are defined in the Dictionary.
 

Trucks must enter sign

106   No buses signs

(1)  The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has information on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM of the bus is more than that mass.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus and with are defined in the Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the Act.
(2)  The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has information on or with it indicating a length if the bus is longer than that length.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has no information on or with it indicating a mass or length.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

 

No buses sign

107   Buses must enter signs

If the driver of a bus drives past a buses must enter sign, the driver must enter the area indicated by information on or with the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus and with are defined in the Dictionary.
 

Buses must enter sign

108   Trucks and buses low gear signs

(1)  If the driver of a truck or bus is driving on a length of road to which a trucks and buses low gear sign applies, the driver must drive the truck or bus in a gear that is low enough to limit the speed of the truck or bus without the use of a primary brake.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus, length of road and truck are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  Subrule (1) does not apply to the driver of a bus if information on or with the sign indicates that it applies only to trucks.
Note. With is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A trucks and buses low gear sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending:
(a)  if information on or with the sign indicates a distance—at that distance on the road from the sign, or
(b)  in any other case—at an end trucks and buses low gear sign on the road.
(4)  In this rule:

primary brake means the footbrake, or other brake, fitted to a truck or bus that is normally used to slow or stop the vehicle.

 

Trucks and buses low gear sign

End trucks and buses low gear sign

Part 9 Roundabouts

109   What is a roundabout

A roundabout is an intersection:
(a)  with either:
(i)  one or more marked lanes, all of which are for the use of vehicles travelling in the same direction around a central traffic island, or
(ii)  room for 1 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction around a central traffic island, and
(b)  with or without a roundabout sign at each entrance.
Note 1. Intersection, marked lane, traffic and traffic island are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign at a place.
 

Roundabout sign

110   Meaning of halfway around a roundabout

A driver leaves a roundabout halfway around the roundabout if the driver leaves the roundabout on a road that is straight ahead, or substantially straight ahead, from the road on which the driver enters the roundabout.

111   Entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road or a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction

(1)  A driver entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road, or a road with room for 2 or more lines of traffic (other than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs or animals) travelling in the same direction as the driver, must enter the roundabout in accordance with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Multi-lane road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the driver is to leave the roundabout less than halfway around it, the driver must enter the roundabout from the left marked lane or, if the road is not a multi-lane road, as near as practicable to the left side of the road.
Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Example 1

Leaving a roundabout less than halfway around it

(3)  If the driver is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it, the driver must enter the roundabout from the right marked lane or, if the road is not a multi-lane road, from the left of, parallel to, and as near as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.
Example. 

Example 2

Leaving a roundabout more than halfway around it

(4)  If the driver is to leave the roundabout halfway around it, the driver may enter the roundabout from any marked lane or, if the road is not a multi-lane road, anywhere on the part of the road on which vehicles travelling in the same direction as the driver may travel.
Example. 

Example 3

Leaving a roundabout halfway around it

(5)  Despite subrules (2) to (4), if the driver is entering the roundabout from a marked lane and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the driver must:
(a)  if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in that direction after entering the roundabout, or
(b)  if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in one of those directions after entering the roundabout.
Note. Traffic lane arrows is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 4

Roundabout with 3 entry points

Example 5

Roundabout with 5 entry points

Note 1 for examples 4 and 5. Rule 116 requires a driver to obey traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving a roundabout.
Note 2 for examples 4 and 5. The rules in Part 11 about driving in marked lanes, and moving from one marked lane or line of traffic, apply to a driver driving in a roundabout—see rules 146 to 148.
(6)  Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.
Note. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
(7)  Subrule (5) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal if the rider is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it.
(8)  Despite subrule (2), a driver may approach and enter the roundabout from the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left lane if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b)  the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle sign, and
(c)  any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point of the roundabout, and
(d)  it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout less than halfway around it from within the left lane, and
(e)  the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely leave the roundabout less than halfway around it by occupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.
(9)  Despite subrule (3), a driver may approach and enter the roundabout from the marked lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b)  the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle sign, and
(c)  any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point of the roundabout, and
(d)  it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it from within the right lane, and
(e)  the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely leave the roundabout more than halfway around it by occupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.
(10)  In this rule:

left lane means:

(a)  the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road, or
(b)  if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked lane that is not obstructed.

marked lane, for a driver, does not include a special purpose lane in which the driver is not permitted to drive.

right lane means:

(a)  the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on the road, or
(b)  if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked lane that is not obstructed.

112   Giving a left change of direction signal when entering a roundabout

(1)  This rule applies to a driver entering a roundabout if:
(a)  the driver is to leave the roundabout at the first exit after entering the roundabout, and
(b)  the exit is less than halfway around the roundabout.
(2)  Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a left change of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Left change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal until the driver has left the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights.
Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.

113   Giving a right change of direction signal when entering a roundabout

(1)  This rule applies to a driver entering a roundabout if the driver is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it.
(2)  Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a right change of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Right change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal while the driver is driving in the roundabout, unless:
(a)  the driver is changing marked lanes, or entering another line of traffic, or
(b)  the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights, or
(c)  the driver is about to leave the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle and marked lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 117 deals with giving change of direction signals before changing marked lanes, or entering another line of traffic, in a roundabout.
Note 3. Rule 118 requires a driver, if practicable, to give a left change of direction signal when leaving a roundabout.

114   Giving way when entering or driving in a roundabout

(1)  A driver entering a roundabout must give way to:
(a)  any vehicle in the roundabout, and
(b)  a tram that is entering or approaching the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Tram is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver driving in a roundabout must give way to a tram that is in, entering or approaching the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

Note 1. Bus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the give way rules applying to a driver moving from one marked lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic, see rule 148.

115   Driving in a roundabout to the left of the central traffic island

(1)  A driver driving in a roundabout must drive:
(a)  to the left of the central traffic island in the roundabout, or
(b)  if subrule (2) applies to the driver—on the edge of the central traffic island, to the left of the centre of the island, or
(c)  if subrule (3) applies to the driver—over the central traffic island, to the left of the centre of the island.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Traffic island is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  This subrule applies to a driver if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout without driving on the edge of the central traffic island, and
(b)  the driver can safely drive on the edge of the central traffic island.
Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  This subrule applies to a driver if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout without driving over the central traffic island, and
(b)  the central traffic island is designed to allow a vehicle of that kind to be driven over it.

116   Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving a roundabout

If a driver is driving in a marked lane in a roundabout and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the driver must:
(a)  if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in or leave the roundabout in that direction, or
(b)  if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in or leave the roundabout in one of those directions.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane and traffic lane arrows are defined in the Dictionary.

117   Giving a change of direction signal when changing marked lanes or lines of traffic in a roundabout

(1)  A driver driving in a roundabout must give a left change of direction signal before the driver changes marked lanes to the left, or enters a part of the roundabout where there is room for another line of traffic to the left, in the roundabout, unless the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle and left change of direction signal are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver driving in a roundabout must give a right change of direction signal before the driver changes marked lanes to the right, or enters a part of the roundabout where there is room for another line of traffic to the right, in the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Right change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.

118   Giving a left change of direction signal when leaving a roundabout

(1)  If practicable, a driver driving in a roundabout must give a left change of direction signal when leaving the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Left change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon as the driver has left the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights.
Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The rules in Part 11 about driving in marked lanes and moving from one marked lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic apply to a driver leaving a roundabout—see rules 146 to 148.

119   Giving way by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle leaving a roundabout

The rider of a bicycle or animal who is riding in the far left marked lane of a roundabout with 2 or more marked lanes, or the far left line of traffic in a roundabout with room for 2 or more lines of traffic (other than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs or animals), must give way to any vehicle leaving the roundabout.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle and marked lane are defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the rider must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.

Part 10 Level crossings

120   What is a level crossing

(1)  A level crossing is:
(a)  an area where a road and a railway meet at substantially the same level, whether or not there is a level crossing sign on the road at all or any of the entrances to the area, or
(b)  an area where a road and tram tracks meet at substantially the same level and that has a level crossing sign on the road at each entrance to the area.
Note. Tram tracks is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13.
 

Level crossing signs

121   Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a level crossing

A driver at a level crossing with a stop sign must:
(a)  stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line or, if there is no stop line, as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop sign, and
(b)  give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Approaching, enter, stop line and tram are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must remain stationary until it is safe for the driver to proceed—see the definition in the Dictionary.
 

Stop sign

122   Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at a level crossing

A driver at a level crossing with a give way sign or give way line must give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Approaching, enter, give way line and tram are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
 

Give way sign

123   Entering a level crossing when a train or tram is approaching etc

A driver must not enter a level crossing if:
(a)  warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red lights) are operating or warning bells are ringing, or
(b)  a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening or closing, or
(c)  a train or tram is on or entering the crossing, or
(d)  a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the crossing, or is sounding a warning, and there would be a danger of a collision with the train or tram if the driver entered the crossing, or
(e)  the driver cannot drive through the crossing because the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Examples for paragraph (e). The crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, may be blocked by congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by stock on the road.
Note. Approaching, enter, tram and twin red lights are defined in the Dictionary.

124   Leaving a level crossing

A driver who enters a level crossing must leave the level crossing as soon as the driver can do so safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Enter is defined in the Dictionary.

Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules

Division 1 General

125   Unreasonably obstructing drivers or pedestrians

(1)  A driver must not unreasonably obstruct the path of another driver or a pedestrian.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver includes a person in control of a vehicle—see the definition of drive in the Dictionary.
(2)  For this rule, a driver does not unreasonably obstruct the path of another driver or a pedestrian only because:
(a)  the driver is stopped in traffic, or
(b)  the driver is driving more slowly than other vehicles (unless the driver is driving abnormally slowly in the circumstances).
Example of a driver driving abnormally slowly. A driver driving at a speed of 20 kilometres per hour on a length of road to which a speed limit of 80 kilometres per hour applies when there is no reason for the driver to drive at that speed on the length of road.

126   Keeping a safe distance behind vehicles

A driver must drive a sufficient distance behind a vehicle travelling in front of the driver so the driver can, if necessary, stop safely to avoid a collision with the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

127   Keeping a minimum distance between long vehicles

(1)  The driver of a long vehicle must drive at least the required minimum distance behind another long vehicle travelling in front of the driver, unless the driver is:
(a)  driving on a multi-lane road or any length of road in a built-up area, or
(b)  overtaking.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Built-up area, length of road, multi-lane road and overtake are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

long vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer.

Note. 

Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).

required minimum distance means:

(a)  for a road train that is behind a long vehicle—200 metres or, if another law of this jurisdiction specifies a different distance, that distance, or
(b)  for a long vehicle other than a road train that is behind a long vehicle—60 metres or, if another law of this jurisdiction specifies a different distance, that distance.

road train has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Mass, Loading and Access) Regulation 2005.

Note. This definition is not uniform with the corresponding definition in rule 127 (2) of the Australian Road Rules. However, the definition in the Australian Road Rules allows the term to be defined by reference to another law of this jurisdiction. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions. Different definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

128   Entering blocked intersections

A driver must not enter an intersection if the driver cannot drive through the intersection because the intersection, or a road beyond the intersection, is blocked.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Examples. The intersection, or a road beyond the intersection, may be blocked by congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.
Note. Enter and intersection are defined in the Dictionary.

128A   Entering blocked crossings

(1)  A driver must not enter a children’s crossing, marked foot crossing or pedestrian crossing if the driver cannot drive through the crossing because the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Examples. The crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, may be blocked by congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.
Note. Children’s crossing, enter, marked foot crossing and pedestrian crossing are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  Despite subrule (1), a driver may enter a children’s crossing or a pedestrian crossing if:
(a)  the crossing is immediately before an intersection that does not have traffic lights, and
(b)  the crossing is not blocked, and
(c)  before entering the crossing, the driver gives way to any pedestrian on the crossing.

Division 2 Keeping to the left

129   Keeping to the far left side of a road

(1)  A driver on a road (except a multi-lane road) must drive as near as practicable to the far left side of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Multi-lane road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike.
Note. Motor bike is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule 13.

130   Keeping to the left on a multi-lane road

(1)  This rule applies to a driver driving on a multi-lane road if:
(a)  the speed limit applying to the driver for the length of road where the driver is driving is over 80 kilometres per hour, or
(b)  a keep left unless overtaking sign applies to the length of road where the driver is driving.
Note 1. Length of road and multi-lane road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 3 deals with speed limits.
(2)  The driver must not drive in the right lane unless:
(a)  the driver is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal, or
(b)  the driver is overtaking, or
(c)  a left lane must turn left sign or left traffic lane arrows apply to any other lane and the driver is not turning left, or
(d)  the driver is required to drive in the right lane under rule 159, or
(e)  the driver is avoiding an obstruction, or
(f)  the traffic in each other lane is congested, or
(g)  the traffic in every lane is congested, or
(h)  the right lane is a special purpose lane in which the driver, under another provision of these Rules, is permitted to drive, or
(i)  there are only 2 marked lanes and the left lane is a slow vehicle turn out lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Centre of the road, left traffic lane arrows, obstruction, overtake, right change of direction signal, special purpose lane, traffic, and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 159 deals with traffic signs that require a particular kind of vehicle to drive in the marked lane indicated by the signs.
Note 3. Rule 329 deals with when a traffic control device applies to a marked lane.
(3)  A keep left unless overtaking sign on a multi-lane road applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:
(a)  an end keep left unless overtaking sign on the road,
(b)  a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the road is no longer a multi-lane road,
(c)  if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of the road.
Note. Road marking, T-intersection and traffic sign are defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  In this rule:

lane, for a driver, means a marked lane for vehicles travelling in the same direction as the driver, but does not include a special purpose lane in which the driver is not permitted to drive.

Note 1. 

Marked lane and special purpose lane are defined in the Dictionary.

Note 2. Rule 95 deals with driving in emergency stopping lanes, and Division 6 of this Part deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.

slow vehicle turn out lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane, to which a slow vehicle turn out lane sign applies.

Note. A slow vehicle turn out lane is designed for slow-moving vehicles to move into to allow faster vehicles to pass in an adjacent marked lane.

 

Keep left unless overtaking sign

End keep left unless overtaking sign

Slow vehicle turn out lane sign

Note for diagrams. There is another permitted version of the end keep left unless overtaking sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.

131   Keeping to the left of oncoming vehicles

(1)  A driver must drive to the left of any oncoming vehicle unless:
(a)  the driver is turning right at an intersection, and
(b)  the driver is passing an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection, and
(c)  there is no traffic sign or road marking indicating that the driver must pass to the left of the oncoming vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection, oncoming vehicle, road marking and traffic sign are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 4, Division 2 deals with making right turns.
(2)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a postal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if:
(a)  the rider is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path, and
(b)  the rider is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or shared path under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction, and
(c)  either:
(i)  the oncoming vehicle is not on the footpath, nature strip or shared path, or
(ii)  the oncoming vehicle is not permitted, under these Rules or under another law of this jurisdiction, to be on the footpath, nature strip or shared path.
Note. Bicycle, footpath, motor bike, nature strip and postal vehicle are defined in the Dictionary and shared path is defined in rule 242.
Examples. 

Example 1

Driving to the left of an oncoming vehicle

Example 2

Oncoming vehicles turning right passing to the right of each other

132   Keeping to the left of the centre of a road or the dividing line

(1)  A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip must drive to the left of the centre of the road, except as permitted under rule 133 or 139 (1).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Centre of the road, dividing line, median strip and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the meaning of driving to the left of something, see rule 351 (3).
Note 3. Rule 133 deals with driving to the right of the centre of the road to overtake another vehicle, to enter or leave a road, to move from one part of the road to another, or because of the width or condition of the road. Rule 139 (1) deals with driving to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an obstruction.
(2)  A driver on a road with a dividing line must drive to the left of the dividing line, except as permitted under rule 134 or 139 (2).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Rule 134 deals with driving to the right of the dividing line to overtake another vehicle, to enter or leave a road, or to move from one part of the road to another. Rule 139 (2) deals with driving to the right of the dividing line to avoid an obstruction.

The effect of this subrule, in relation to continuous dividing lines, is as follows:

(a)  in the case of a dividing line that is only a single continuous dividing line, or that is a broken dividing line to the right of a single continuous dividing line, a driver may only drive to the right of such a line in the circumstances set out in rules 134 (3) and 139 (2), as supplemented by rule 139 (3),
(b)  in the case of a dividing line that is a single continuous dividing line to the right of a broken dividing line, a driver may only drive to the right of such a line in the circumstances set out in rules 134 (2), 134 (3) and 139 (2),
(c)  in the case of a dividing line that is 2 parallel continuous dividing lines, a driver may only drive to the right of such a line in the circumstances set out in rule 139 (2), as supplemented by rule 139 (3).

(2A)  A driver on a road with a single continuous dividing line, a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines must not drive across the dividing lines to perform a U-turn.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

 

Example 1

Driving across a single continuous dividing line to make a U-turn is not permitted

Example 2

Driving across a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line to make a U-turn is not permitted

Example 3

Driving across 2 parallel continuous dividing lines to make a U-turn is not permitted

(3)  This rule, and rules 133, 134 and 139 (1) and (2), apply to a service road to which a two-way sign applies as if it were a separate road, but do not apply to any other service road.
Note 1. Service road is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 136 deals with driving on a service road without a two-way sign.
(4)  In this rule:

road does not include a footpath, nature strip, bicycle path, separated footpath or shared path.

Note. Footpath and nature strip are defined in the Dictionary, bicycle path and separated footpath are defined in rule 239 and shared path is defined in rule 242.
 

Two-way sign

Note for diagram. There is another permitted version of the two-way sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Examples for subrule (2). 

Example 1

Driving to the left of a single continuous dividing line only

Example 2

Driving to the left of a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line

Example 3

Driving to the left of 2 parallel continuous dividing lines

133   Exceptions to keeping to the left of the centre of a road

(1)  This rule applies to a driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip.
Note. Dividing line, median strip and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The driver may drive to the right of the centre of the road:
(a)  to overtake another driver, or
(b)  to enter or leave the road, or
(c)  to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or emergency stopping lane).
Note. Centre of the road, overtake and service road are defined in the Dictionary, and emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95.
(3)  The driver may also drive to the right of the centre of the road if:
(a)  because of the width or condition of the road, it is not practicable to drive to the left of the centre of the road, and
(b)  the driver can do so safely.

134   Exceptions to keeping to the left of a dividing line

(1)  This rule applies to a driver on a road with a dividing line.
Note. Dividing line is defined the Dictionary.
(2)  If the dividing line is a single broken dividing line only, or a broken dividing line to the left of a single continuous dividing line, the driver may drive to the right of the dividing line:
(a)  to overtake another driver, or
(b)  to perform a U-turn, unless another rule would prohibit the driver performing the U-turn.
Note 1. Overtake is defined the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver must not overtake another driver unless the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic, and it is safe to overtake the other driver—see rule 140.
(3)  If the dividing line is a single continuous line or broken dividing line, or a broken dividing line to the left or right of a single continuous dividing line, the driver may drive to the right of the dividing line:
(a)  to enter or leave the road, or
(b)  to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or emergency stopping lane).
Note. Emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95, and service road is defined in the Dictionary.
(3–1)  Without limiting subrule (2) or (3), a driver on a road with a dividing line (whether or not continuous) may drive to the right of the dividing line to enter or leave the road by the shortest practicable route.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 134 of the Australian Road Rules.
Examples. 

Example 1

Driving to the right of the centre of the road permitted—overtaking on a road with a broken dividing line only

Example 2

Driving to the right of the centre of the road permitted—overtaking on a road with a broken dividing line to the left of a single continuous dividing line

Example 2A

Driving across a single continuous dividing line is permitted to enter or leave the road

Example 2B

Driving across a single continuous dividing line is permitted to leave the road to enter a road related area

Example 2C

Driving across a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line is permitted to enter or leave the road

Example 3

Driving to the right of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking on a road with a single continuous dividing line only

Example 4

Driving to the right of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking on a road with a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line

Example 5

Driving to the right of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking on a road with 2 parallel continuous dividing lines

Note on examples. These examples do not include the crossing of a dividing line as permitted by subrule (3–1).

135   Keeping to the left of a median strip

(1)  A driver on a road with a median strip must drive to the left of the median strip, unless the driver is:
(a)  entering or driving in a median strip parking area, or
(b)  required to drive to the right of the median strip by a keep right sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Median strip and median strip parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the meaning of driving to the left of something, see rule 351 (3).
(2)  In this rule:

median strip does not include a painted island.

Note 1. Painted island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 138 deals with keeping off painted islands.
 

Keep right sign

136   Driving on a one-way service road

A driver on the part of the road that is a service road (except a service road to which a two-way sign applies) must drive in the same direction as a vehicle travelling on the part of the road closest to the service road is required to travel.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Service road is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Two-way sign

Note for diagram. There is another permitted version of the two-way sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.

137   Keeping off a dividing strip

(1)  A driver must not drive on a dividing strip, except as permitted under this rule or rule 139 (4).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Dividing strip is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 139 deals with avoiding obstructions on a road.
(2)  A driver may drive on a dividing strip that is at the same level as the road, and marked at each side by a continuous line:
(a)  to enter or leave the road, or
(b)  to enter or leave an area on the dividing strip to which a parking control sign applies if the driver is permitted to park in the area.
Note 1. Parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 12 deals with restrictions on stopping and parking.
(2A)  For the purposes of subrule (2), a dividing strip is to be treated as being at the same level as the road even if it contains one or more raised pavement bars or markers.
(3)  In this rule:

dividing strip does not include a painted island.

Note 1. Painted island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 138 deals with keeping off painted islands.

138   Keeping off a painted island

(1)  A driver must not drive on or over a single continuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines, along a side of or surrounding a painted island, except as permitted under this rule or rule 139 (4).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Painted island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 139 deals with avoiding obstructions on a road.
Example. 

Painted island surrounded by 2 parallel continuous lines

In this example, vehicle B is contravening the rule.

(2)  A driver may drive on or over a single continuous line along the side of or surrounding a painted island for up to 50 metres:
(a)  to enter or leave the road, or
(b)  to enter a turning lane that begins immediately after the painted island.
Note 1. Turning lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 85 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a turning lane from a painted island and rule 197 deals with stopping on painted islands.
Note 3. Subrule (3) excludes certain painted islands from the application of paragraph (a).
(3)  Subrule (2) (a) does not apply in the case of a painted island:
(a)  that separates a road that takes vehicles in one direction from another road that takes vehicles in the same direction at a place where the roads merge, or
(b)  that separates one part of a road from other parts of the road to create a slip lane.
Note. Slip lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Example 2

In these examples, vehicle B is contravening the rule.

139   Exceptions for avoiding obstructions on a road

(1)  A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip may drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an obstruction if:
(a)  the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic, and
(b)  it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the driver to drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid the obstruction, and
(c)  the driver can do so safely.
Note. Approaching, centre of the road, dividing line, median strip, obstruction, traffic and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver on a road with a dividing line may drive to the right of the dividing line to avoid an obstruction if:
(a)  the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic, and
(b)  it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the driver to drive to the right of the dividing line to avoid the obstruction, and
(c)  the driver can do so safely.
(3)  For subrule (2), if the dividing line is a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line, a single continuous dividing line only or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines, the hazard in driving to the right of such a dividing line must be taken into account in deciding whether it is reasonable to drive to the right of the dividing line.
(4)  A driver may drive on a dividing strip, or on or over a single continuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines, along a side of or surrounding a painted island, to avoid an obstruction if:
(a)  the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic, and
(b)  it is necessary and reasonable to drive on the dividing strip or painted island to avoid the obstruction, and
(c)  the driver can do so safely.
Note. Dividing strip and painted island are defined in the Dictionary.

Division 3 Overtaking

140   No overtaking unless safe to do so

A driver must not overtake a vehicle unless:
(a)  the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic, and
(b)  the driver can safely overtake the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Approaching, overtake and traffic are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver is not permitted to overtake another vehicle by crossing a single continuous dividing line only, a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines—see rules 134 (2) and 132 (2).

141   No overtaking etc to the left of a vehicle

(1)  A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not overtake a vehicle to the left of the vehicle unless:
(a)  the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can be safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle, or
(b)  the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and it is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle, or
(c)  the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle, centre of the road, marked lane, multi-lane road, overtake, right change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle that is turning left and is giving a left change of direction signal.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Left change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

turning right does not include making a hook turn.

vehicle does not include a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks, or any vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.

Note 1. Bus, tram and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook turns.
Note 3. Division 7 of this Part deals with overtaking and passing trams (and buses travelling along tram tracks). Rule 143 deals with overtaking or passing a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.

142   No overtaking to the right of a vehicle turning right etc

(1)  A driver must not overtake to the right of a vehicle if the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Centre of the road, overtake, right change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

turning right does not include making a hook turn.

vehicle does not include a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks, or any vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.

Note 1. Bus, tram and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook turns.
Note 3. Division 7 of this Part deals with overtaking and passing trams (and buses travelling along tram tracks). Rule 143 deals with overtaking or passing a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.

143   Passing or overtaking a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign

(1)  A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle is turning left and is giving a left change of direction signal, unless it is safe to do so.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Left change of direction signal and overtake are defined in the Dictionary.
(1A)  A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign unless:
(a)  the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can be safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle, or
(b)  the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and it is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle, or
(c)  the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Centre of the road, marked lane, multi-lane road, overtake, right change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the right of a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal, unless it is safe to do so.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Example. A driver driving on a multi-lane road who is turning right at an intersection to which a right turn only sign applies may drive past a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign that is turning right from another marked lane, and giving a right change of direction signal, if it is safe to do so.
Note. Centre of the road, right change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

turning right does not include making a hook turn.

Note. Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook turns.
 

Do not overtake turning vehicle signs

Note 1 for diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long vehicles.
Note 2 for diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule 316–1.

144   Keeping a safe distance when overtaking

A driver overtaking a vehicle:
(a)  must pass the vehicle at a sufficient distance to avoid a collision with the vehicle or obstructing the path of the vehicle, and
(b)  must not return to the marked lane or line of traffic where the vehicle is travelling until the driver is a sufficient distance past the vehicle to avoid a collision with the vehicle or obstructing the path of the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane and overtake are defined in the Dictionary.

145   Driver being overtaken not to increase speed

If a driver is overtaking another driver on a two-way road by crossing a dividing line, or crossing to the right of the centre of the road, the other driver must not increase the speed at which the driver is driving until the first driver:
(a)  has passed the other driver, and
(b)  has returned to the marked lane or line of traffic where the other driver is driving, and
(c)  is a sufficient distance in front of the other driver to avoid a collision.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Centre of the road, dividing line, marked lane, overtake and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary.

Division 4 Driving in marked lanes or lines of traffic

146   Driving within a single marked lane or line of traffic

(1)  A driver on a multi-lane road must drive so the driver’s vehicle is completely in a marked lane, unless the driver is:
(a)  entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or a shoulder of the road), or
(b)  entering or leaving the road, or
(c)  moving from one marked lane to another marked lane, or
(d)  avoiding an obstruction, or
(e)  obeying a traffic control device applying to the marked lane, or
(f)  permitted to drive in more than one marked lane under another provision of these Rules or under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle, marked lane, multi-lane road, obstruction, service road and traffic control device are defined in the Dictionary and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. A driver is generally not permitted to move from one marked lane to another marked lane across a continuous line separating the lanes—see rule 147.
Note 3. Rule 148 deals with giving way when moving from one marked lane to another marked lane.
Note 4. An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a marked lane—see rule 152.
Note 5. Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked lanes when turning at an intersection—see rule 28 (left turns) and rule 32 (right turns).
(2)  A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction as the driver, but without marked lanes, must drive so the driver’s vehicle is completely in a single line of traffic unless:
(a)  it is not practicable to drive completely in a single line of traffic, or
(b)  the driver is entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or a shoulder of the road), or
(c)  the driver is entering or leaving the road, or
(d)  the driver is moving from one line of traffic to another line of traffic, or
(e)  the driver is avoiding an obstruction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Rule 148 deals with giving way when moving from one line of traffic to another line of traffic.

147   Moving from one marked lane to another marked lane across a continuous line separating the lanes

A driver on a multi-lane road must not move from one marked lane to another marked lane by crossing a continuous line separating the lanes unless:
(a)  the driver is avoiding an obstruction, or
(b)  the driver is obeying a traffic control device applying to the first marked lane, or
(c)  the driver is permitted to drive in both marked lanes under another provision of these Rules or under another law of this jurisdiction, or
(d)  either of the marked lanes is a special purpose lane in which the driver is permitted to drive under these Rules and the driver is moving to or from the special purpose lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Marked lane, multi-lane road, obstruction, special purpose lane and traffic control device are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a marked lane—see rule 152.
Note 3. Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked lanes when turning at an intersection—see rule 28 (left turns) and rule 32 (right turns).
Note 4. Rule 95 deals with driving in emergency stopping lanes, and Division 6 of this Part deals with driving in other special purpose lanes.

148   Giving way when moving from one marked lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic

(1)  A driver who is moving from one marked lane (whether or not the lane is ending) to another marked lane must give way to any vehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver in the marked lane to which the driver is moving.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Marked lane and multi-lane road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Giving way when moving from one marked lane to another marked lane

Example 1

Example 2

In these examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

(2)  A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction as the driver, and who is moving from one line of traffic to another line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver in the line of traffic to which the driver is moving.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  Subrule (2) does not apply to a driver if the line of traffic in which the driver is driving is merging with the line of traffic to which the driver is moving.
Note. Rule 149 deals with giving way when lines of traffic merge.
Example. 

Giving way when moving from one line of traffic to another line of traffic when the lines are not merging

In this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A

148A   Giving way when moving within a single marked lane

If a driver diverges to the left or right within a marked lane, the driver must give way to any vehicle that is in the lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.

149   Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic

A driver in a line of traffic that is merging with one or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction as the driver must give way to a vehicle in another line of traffic if any part of the vehicle is ahead of the driver’s vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic

In this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.

150   Driving on or across a continuous white edge line

(1)  A driver must not drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a road unless subrule (1A) or (1B) applies to the driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Edge line is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a continuous yellow edge line—see rule 169.
(1A)  A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a road if the driver is:
(a)  overtaking a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal, or
(b)  driving a slow-moving vehicle, and it is necessary for the driver to drive on or over the edge line to allow the vehicle to be overtaken or passed by another vehicle, or
(c)  driving a vehicle that is too wide, or too long, to drive on the road without driving on or over the edge line, or
(d)  carrying out functions under the road transport legislation or complying with a direction given by a police officer or other person carrying out functions under the road transport legislation, or
(e)  avoiding an obstruction.
Note 1. Centre of the road, obstruction, overtake, right change of direction signal, road transport legislation and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (1A) (d) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 150 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a driver to drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a road. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(1B)  A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a road for up to 100 metres if the driver is:
(a)  turning at an intersection, or
(b)  entering or leaving the road, or
(c)  entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road, a shoulder of the road or an emergency stopping lane), or
(d)  stopping at the side of the road (including any shoulder of the road).
Note. Intersection and service road are defined in the Dictionary, emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
(2)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.
Note. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  For this rule, a driver drives over a continuous white edge line on a road if:
(a)  for a line on the far left side of the road—the driver’s vehicle is wholly or partly to the left of the line, or
(b)  for a line on the far right side of the road—the driver’s vehicle is wholly or partly to the right of the line.

151   Riding a motor bike or bicycle alongside more than 1 other rider

(1)  The rider of a motor bike or bicycle must not ride on a road that is not a multi-lane road alongside more than 1 other rider, unless subrule (3) applies to the rider.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle, motor bike and multi-lane road are defined in the Dictionary, and rider is defined in rule 17.
(2)  The rider of a motor bike or bicycle must not ride in a marked lane alongside more than 1 other rider in the marked lane, unless subrule (3) applies to the rider.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  The rider of a motor bike or bicycle may ride alongside more than 1 other rider if the rider is:
(a)  overtaking the other riders, or
(b)  permitted to do so under another law of this jurisdiction.
Note. Overtake is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  If the rider of a motor bike or bicycle is riding on a road that is not a multi-lane road alongside another rider, or in a marked lane alongside another rider in the marked lane, the rider must ride not over 1.5 metres from the other rider.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes a bicycle path, shared path and any shoulder of the road.

Note. Bicycle path is defined in rule 239, road related area is defined in rule 13, shared path is defined in rule 242, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

Division 5 Obeying overhead lane control devices applying to marked lanes

152   Complying with overhead lane control devices

(1)  A driver in a marked lane to which an overhead lane control device applies must comply with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane and overhead lane control device are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the device displays an illuminated red diagonal cross or is a traffic sign displaying a red diagonal cross, the driver must not drive in the marked lane past the device.
(3)  If the device displays a flashing illuminated red diagonal cross, the driver must leave the marked lane as soon as it is safe to do so.
(4)  If the device displays an illuminated white, green or yellow arrow pointing downwards or indicating one or more directions, the driver may drive in the marked lane past the device.
Example. 

Overhead lane control device applying to marked lanes

Note for diagram. If the device displays an arrow indicating one or more directions, the device operates also as traffic lane arrows—see the definition of traffic lane arrows in the Dictionary. Rule 92 deals with traffic lane arrows.

Division 6 Driving in marked lanes designated for special purposes

153   Bicycle lanes

(1)  A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive in a bicycle lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bicycle lane under this rule or rule 158.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against this rule.
(2)  If stopping or parking is permitted at a place in a bicycle lane under another law of this jurisdiction, a driver may drive for up to 50 metres in the bicycle lane to stop or park at that place.
Note. Part 12 deals with parking and restricted stopping areas.
(3)  A driver may drive for up to 50 metres in a bicycle lane if:
(a)  the driver is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is dropping off or picking up, passengers, and
(b)  there is not another law of this jurisdiction prohibiting the driver from driving in the bicycle lane.
Note 1. Public bus and taxi are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The term public minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The reference to that term in this subrule is retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road Rules.
(4)  A bicycle lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:
(a)  beginning at a bicycle lane sign applying to the lane, and
(b)  ending at the nearest of the following:
(i)  an end bicycle lane sign applying to the lane,
(ii)  an intersection (unless the lane is at the unbroken side of the continuing road at a T-intersection or continued across the intersection by broken lines),
(iii)  if the road ends at a dead end—the end of the road.
Note. Continuing road, intersection, marked lane and T-intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
 

Bicycle lane sign

End bicycle lane sign

154   Bus lanes

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not drive in a bus lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bus lane under rule 158.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Public bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against this rule.
(2)  A bus lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:
(a)  beginning at a bus lane sign (whether or not there is also a bus lane road marking) and ending at the nearest of the following:
(i)  an end bus lane sign,
(ii)  a traffic sign that indicates the beginning of another special purpose lane, or
(b)  beginning at a bus lane road marking (if there is no bus lane sign) and ending at the next intersection.
Note. Intersection, marked lane, special purpose lane and traffic sign are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

bus lane road marking means a road marking consisting of:

(a)  the letters “BL”, or
(b)  the words “bus lane”, or
(c)  the words “bus only” or “buses only”.

Note. Road marking is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Bus lane signs

Bus lane sign

Bus lane sign

End bus lane signs

End bus lane sign

End bus lane sign

Note for diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of bus lane signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.

155   Tram lanes

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or public bus) must not drive in a tram lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the tram lane under this rule or rule 158.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Public bus, tram and tram recovery vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against this rule.
(2)  A driver may drive in a tram lane if the driver is driving a truck and it is necessary for the driver to drive in the tram lane to reach a place to drop off, or pick up, passengers or goods.
(3)  A tram lane is a part of a road with tram tracks that:
(a)  is between a tram lane sign and an end tram lane sign, and
(b)  is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the direction of travel of a tram on the tracks) by a continuous yellow line parallel to the tracks.
Note. Tram tracks is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Tram lane sign

End tram lane sign

Example. 

Tram lane

155A   Tramways

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or public bus) must not drive in a tramway, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the tramway under subrule (2).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Public bus, tram and tram recovery vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The exceptions and defence provided in rule 158 do not apply to tramways.
(2)  A driver may drive in a tramway if:
(a)  it is necessary for the driver to drive in the tramway to avoid an obstruction, and
(b)  when driving in the tramway, the driver does not move into the path of an approaching tram or public bus travelling in the tramway.
Note. Obstruction is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A tramway is a part of a road with tram tracks that:
(a)  is between a tramway sign and an end tramway sign, and
(b)  is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the direction of travel of a tram on the tracks) by either:
(i)  2 continuous yellow lines parallel to the tracks, or
(ii)  a structure (for example, a dividing strip, pedestrian refuge, traffic island, row of bollards or separation kerb), whether or not the structure is also being used to indicate a safety zone,
      but does include any part of the road where vehicles are permitted to cross the tramway.
(4)  For the purposes of subparagraph (3) (b) (i), a line is to be considered to be continuous despite any break in it that is designed to permit vehicles to cross the tramway.
Note. Dividing strip, traffic island and tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
 

Tramway sign

End tramway sign

Examples. 

Tramway with double yellow line

Tramway with separation kerb

156   Transit lanes

(1)  A driver must not drive in a transit lane unless:
(a)  the driver is driving:
(i)  a public bus, public minibus, motor bike, taxi or tram, or
(ii)  if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a transit lane (T2) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 1 other person, or
(iii)  if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a transit lane (T3) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 2 other people, or
(b)  the driver is permitted to drive in the transit lane under rule 158.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Motor bike, public bus, taxi and tram are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The term public minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The reference to that term in this subrule is retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road Rules.
Note 3. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against this rule.
(2)  A transit lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:
(a)  beginning at a transit lane sign, and
(b)  ending at an end transit lane sign.
Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Transit lane signs

Transit lane (T2) sign

Transit lane (T3) sign

End transit lane signs

End transit lane (T2) sign

End transit lane (T3) sign

Note for diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of the transit lane sign—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.

157   Truck lanes

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a truck) must not drive in a truck lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the truck lane under rule 158.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Truck is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against this rule.
(2)  A truck lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:
(a)  beginning at a truck lane sign, and
(b)  ending at an end truck lane sign.
Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Truck lane sign

End truck lane sign

157–1   NSW rule: T-Way lanes

(cf RRR, cl 96B)

(1)  A driver (except the driver of an authorised T-Way vehicle) must not drive in a T-Way lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A driver (except the driver of an authorised T-Way vehicle) must not stop in a T-Way lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  A T-Way lane is a marked lane, or part of a marked lane:
(a)  beginning with a T-Way lane sign, and
(b)  ending with the nearest of the following:
(i)  an end T-Way lane sign,
(ii)  an intersection.
Note. Marked lane and intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
 

T-Way lane sign

End T-Way lane sign

(4)  In this rule:

authorised T-Way vehicle means a vehicle (or a vehicle belonging to a class of vehicles) approved by the Authority that displays in a prominent position on the vehicle adjacent to each number-plate an authorised T-Way vehicle label or plate.

Authorised T-Way vehicle label or plate

Note for diagram. This label or plate is displayed on certain vehicles.
Note 1. 

Authority is defined in the Act.

Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

158   Exceptions to driving in special purpose lanes etc

(1)  The driver of any vehicle may drive for up to the permitted distance in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane:
(a)  to enter or leave the road, or
(b)  to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road, the shoulder of the road or an emergency stopping lane), or
(c)  to overtake a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal, or
(d)  to enter a marked lane, or part of the road where there is room for a line of traffic (other than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs or animals), from the side of the road.
Note 1. Permitted distance is defined in subrule (4).
Note 2. Bicycle lane is defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined in rule 154, emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95, centre of the road, marked lane, overtake, right change of direction signal, service road and U-turn are defined in the Dictionary, shoulder is defined in rule 12, tram lane is defined in rule 155, transit lane is defined in rule 156, and truck lane is defined in rule 157.
Note 3. A driver must keep clear of a tram travelling in a tram lane—see rule 76.
(1–1)  Subrule (1) does not apply to a driver in a bus only lane.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 158 of the Australian Road Rules.
(2)  The driver of any vehicle may drive in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if:
(a)  it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to avoid an obstruction, or
(b)  information on or with a traffic sign applying to the lane indicates that the driver may drive in the lane, or
(c)  the driver is:
(i)  riding a bicycle in a bus lane (other than a bus only lane), tram lane, transit lane or truck lane, or
(ii)  driving a taxi or motor bike in a bus lane (other than a bus only lane), or
(iii)  driving a special purpose vehicle in a bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane, or
(iv)  driving an NRMA Road Patrol vehicle in a transit lane while on duty with the NRMA Road Patrol service and is responding to an urgent or priority call, or
(v)  driving a police vehicle, ambulance or fire brigade vehicle in a transit lane or bus lane (other than a bus only lane) while returning to base after proceeding to the scene of an accident or other emergency, or
(vi)  driving a vehicle in a bus lane (other than a bus only lane), tram lane, transit lane or truck lane where vehicle is being operated by or at the direction of the Authority for the purpose of conducting road and traffic surveys.
Note 1. Obstruction, traffic sign and with are defined in the Dictionary, and Authority is defined in the Act.
Note 2. Subrule (2) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 158 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a driver to drive in special purpose lanes. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(3)  It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division for driving in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if:
(a)  it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to stop at a place in the lane, and
(b)  the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction, or it is a defence under rule 165 for the driver to stop at that place, and
(c)  if the lane is a bicycle lane—the driver drives in the lane for no more than the permitted distance.
Note. Rule 165 provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of Part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking). The defence is available, for example, if the driver needs to stop to deal with a medical or other emergency.
(4)  In this rule:

bus only lane means:

(a)  a bus lane beginning at a bus lane sign where the words “bus only” or “buses only” appear on or with the sign, or
(b)  a bus lane beginning at a bus lane road marking where the road marking consists of the words “bus only” or “buses only”.
Note 1. 

Bus lane and bus lane road marking are defined in rule 154.

Note 2. There is no corresponding definition for this term for the purposes of rule 158 of the Australian Road Rules. The definition is required for the purposes of subrule (2) (c).

permitted distance means:

(a)  for a bicycle lane or a tram lane—50 metres, or
(b)  for any other lane—100 metres.

special purpose vehicle means a motor vehicle (whether a tow truck, a vehicle used for repairing traffic control light signals or another vehicle) being operated by or at the direction of the Authority and proceeding to the scene of an accident or other emergency.

Note 1. 

Authority is defined in the Act.

Note 2. There is no corresponding definition for this term for the purposes of rule 158 of the Australian Road Rules. The definition is required for the purposes of subrule (2) (c).

159   Marked lanes required to be used by particular kinds of vehicles

(1)  If information on or with a traffic sign applying to a length of road indicates that a vehicle of a particular kind must drive in a particular marked lane, a driver driving a vehicle of that kind on the length of road must drive in the indicated lane, unless the driver is:
(a)  avoiding an obstruction, or
(b)  obeying a traffic control device applying to the indicated lane, or
(c)  permitted to drive in the indicated lane and also another marked lane under another provision of these Rules or under another law of this jurisdiction, or
(d)  intending to turn off the road or to make a U-turn, and in order to do so safely without disrupting other vehicles on the road it is necessary to position the vehicle in another lane before starting the turn, or to make the turn.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Length of road, marked lane, obstruction, traffic control device, traffic sign and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a marked lane—see rule 152.
Note 3. Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked lanes when turning at an intersection—see rule 28 (left turns) and rule 32 (right turns).
(2)  A traffic sign mentioned in this rule that is on a road applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:
(a)  a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the first traffic sign no longer applies,
(b)  the next intersection on the road,
(c)  if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of the road.
Note 1. Intersection, road marking, T-intersection and traffic sign are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign on a road.
Examples of a traffic sign mentioned in the rule and a traffic sign indicating that the first traffic sign no longer applies. 

Trucks use left lane sign

End trucks use left lane sign

Note for diagrams. There are other permitted versions of these signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.

Division 7 Passing trams and safety zones

Note. Bus, tram, tram tracks and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.

160   Passing or overtaking a tram that is not at or near the left side of a road

(1)  This rule applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks that are not at or near the far left side of the road.
(2)  The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the right of the tram, unless the driver is permitted to do so by a traffic sign or road marking.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Overtake is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is turning left or is giving a left change of direction signal, unless the driver is turning left and there is no danger of a collision with the tram.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Left change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

161   Passing or overtaking a tram at or near the left side of a road

(1)  This rule applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks at or near the far left side of the road.
(2)  The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the left of the tram unless the driver is turning left and there is no danger of a collision with the tram.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is turning right or is giving a right change of direction signal.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Right change of direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

162   Driving past a safety zone

(1)  A driver driving past a safety zone:
(a)  must not drive on the safety zone, and
(b)  must drive to the left of the safety zone at a speed that does not put at risk the safety of any pedestrian crossing the road to or from the safety zone.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A safety zone is an area of a road:
(a)  at a place with safety zone signs at or near a tram stop, and
(b)  indicated by a structure on the road (for example, a dividing strip, pedestrian refuge or traffic island).
Note. Dividing strip and traffic island are defined in the Dictionary.
 

Safety zone sign

163   Driving past the rear of a stopped tram at a tram stop

(1)  A driver must comply with this rule if:
(a)  the driver is driving behind the rear of a tram travelling in the same direction as the driver, and
(b)  the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the road, and
(c)  there is no safety zone, dividing strip or traffic island between the tram and the part of the road where the driver is driving, and
(d)  there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule (5)) that permits the driver to pass the tram without stopping.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Dividing strip, traffic island and tram stop are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(2)  The driver must stop before passing the rear of the tram.
(3)  After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), the driver must not proceed if:
(a)  one or more of the doors on the side of the tram closest to the driver are open or opening, or
(b)  a pedestrian is entering or crossing the road between the tram tracks and the far left side of the road.
(4)  After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), if the tram remains at the tram stop and subrule (3) (a) and (b) do not apply, the driver must not proceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10 kilometres per hour.
(5)  However, subrules (2), (3) and (4) do not apply if the driver is directed to drive past the tram by an authorised person.
(6)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

164   Stopping beside a stopped tram at a tram stop

(1)  A driver must comply with this rule if:
(a)  the driver is driving alongside, or overtaking, a tram travelling in the same direction as the driver, and
(b)  the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the road, and
(c)  there is no safety zone, dividing strip or traffic island between the tram and the part of the road where the driver is driving, and
(d)  there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule (5)) that permits the driver to pass the tram without stopping.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Dividing strip, traffic island and tram stop are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(2)  The driver must stop.
(3)  After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), the driver must not proceed if:
(a)  one or more of the doors on the side of the tram closest to the driver are open or opening, or
(b)  a pedestrian is entering or crossing the road between the tram tracks and the far left side of the road.
(4)  After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), if the tram remains at the tram stop and subrule (3) (a) and (b) do not apply, the driver must not proceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10 kilometres per hour.
(5)  However, subrules (2), (3) and (4) do not apply if the driver is directed to drive past the tram by an authorised person.
(6)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

164A   Staying stopped if a tram comes from behind a stopped driver and stops

(1)  A driver must comply with this rule if:
(a)  the driver is stopped beside a tram stop, and
(b)  a tram stops at the tram stop, except at the far left side of the road, and
(c)  there is no safety zone, dividing strip or traffic island between the tram and the part of the road where the driver is driving, and
(d)  there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule (4)) that permits the driver to proceed past the tram.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Dividing strip, traffic island and tram stop are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(2)  The driver must not proceed if:
(a)  one or more of the doors on the side of the tram closest to the driver are open or opening, or
(b)  a pedestrian is entering or crossing the road between the tram tracks and the far left side of the road.
(3)  If the tram remains at the tram stop and subrules (2) (a) and (b) do not apply, the driver must not proceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10 kilometres per hour.
(4)  However, subrules (2) and (3) do not apply if the driver is directed to proceed past the tram by an authorised person.
(5)  In this rule:

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

Part 12 Restrictions on stopping and parking

Division 1 General

Note 1. For the general rules about the application of traffic signs (including parking control signs), see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3 especially rules 332 to 335 and 346. Parking control signs often include information about the times they apply and the types of vehicles to which they do not apply—see rules 317 and 318. For the meaning of abbreviations and symbols on parking control signs, see rule 347 and Schedule 1.
Note 2. Park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.

165   Stopping in an emergency etc or to comply with another rule

It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Part if:
(a)  the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to avoid a collision, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary to avoid the collision, or
(b)  the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, because the driver’s vehicle is disabled, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary for the vehicle to be moved safely to a place where the driver is permitted to park the vehicle under these Rules, or
(c)  the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to deal with a medical or other emergency, or to assist a disabled vehicle, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the circumstances, or
(d)  the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, because the condition of the driver, a passenger, or the driver’s vehicle makes it necessary for the driver to stop in the interests of safety, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the circumstances, or
(e)  the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to comply with another provision of these Rules or a provision of another law, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary to comply with the other provision.
Example for paragraph (e). If a driver stops at an intersection at a stop line, stop sign, or traffic lights, or to give way to a vehicle, in accordance with these Rules, the driver does not contravene rule 170 (stopping in or near an intersection).
Note 1. See rule 125 (in Part 11) for the offence of unreasonably obstructing the path of another vehicle or a pedestrian.
Note 2. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.

166   Application of Part to bicycles

This Part does not apply to a bicycle that is parked at a bicycle rail or in a bicycle rack.
Note. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.

Division 2 No stopping and no parking signs and road markings

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

167   No stopping signs

A driver must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Rule 167–1 provides for transitional arrangements dealing with no standing signs. Rule 167–2 permits a taxi driver to drop off or pick up passengers or luggage in Central Sydney on lengths of roads or areas to which a no stopping sign applies.
 

No stopping signs

No stopping sign

(for a length of road)

No stopping sign

(for an area)

Note 1 for diagrams. There is another permitted version of the no stopping sign (for a length of road)—see the diagram in Schedule 3 and rule 167–1.
Note 2 for diagrams. A no stopping sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

167–1   NSW rule: no standing signs

(cf RRR, cl 16)

(1)  Despite rule 167, a driver is permitted to stop on a length of road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies (being a sign on which the words “no standing” appear) for the purpose of dropping off, or picking up, passengers.
Note 1. Rule 167 provides that a driver must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies. This rule and rule 167–2 provide for exceptions to rule 167.
Note 2. A no standing sign is a no stopping sign for the purposes of these Rules—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
(2)  Subrule (1) ceases to have effect on 1 December 2008.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules. However, rule 167 of the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to provide for transitional arrangements dealing with no standing signs.

167–2   NSW rule: taxis stopping in Central Sydney Taxi Zone

(cf RRR, cl 6 of Sch 1)

(1)  Despite rule 167, the driver of a taxi is permitted to stop on a road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies and that is located within the Central Sydney Taxi Zone if:
(a)  the sign displays a reference to particular days or times when restrictions on stopping apply, and
(b)  the driver is stopping for the sole purpose of dropping off, or picking up, passengers or luggage, and
(c)  the driver stops for a period not exceeding one minute.
Note. Rule 167 provides that a driver must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies. This rule and rule 167–1 provide for exceptions to rule 167.
(2)  Nothing in this rule limits rule 167–1.
(3)  In this rule:

Central Sydney Taxi Zone:

(a)  consists of that area within the City of Sydney bounded by the Harbour from Day Street, Darling Harbour, in the west to the Opera House in the north, and thence along Macquarie Street, Prince Albert Road, College Street, Wentworth Avenue and Elizabeth Street in the east, Eddy Avenue, Pitt Street, Railway Square and Broadway in the south, and Harris Street, William Henry Street, Pier Street, Harbour Street and Day Street in the west, returning to the waterfront at Darling Harbour, and
(b)  includes those named roads specified as constituting the boundary of the area.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

168   No parking signs

(1)  The driver of a vehicle must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which a no parking sign applies, unless the driver:
(a)  is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods, and
(b)  does not leave the vehicle unattended, and
(c)  completes the dropping off, or picking up, of the passengers or goods, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case, within the required time after stopping.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver leaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3 metres from the closest point of the vehicle.
(3)  In this rule:

required time means:

(a)  if information on or with the sign indicates a time—the indicated time, or
(b)  if there is no indicated time—2 minutes, or
(c)  if there is no indicated time, or the indicated time is less than 5 minutes, and rule 206 applies to the driver—5 minutes.

Note 1. With is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 206 applies to a driver if the driver’s vehicle displays a current parking permit for people with disabilities and the driver complies with the conditions of use of the permit—see rule 206 (1).
 

No parking signs

No parking sign

(for a length of road)

No parking sign

(for an area)

Note 1 for diagrams. There is another permitted version of the no parking sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. A no parking sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

168–1   NSW rule: restricted parking areas

(cf RRR, cl 60)

(1)  The driver of a vehicle (other than a public utility service vehicle) must not stop in a restricted parking area, unless the driver is:
(a)  stopping in a parking station or in accordance with the directions marked on (or on a sign displayed adjacent to) a parking bay, or
(b)  actually engaged in dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Parking bay, stop, public utility service vehicle and vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A restricted parking area is an area with:
(a)  a restricted parking area sign on each road into the area, and
(b)  an end restricted parking area sign on each road out of the area.
(3)  In this rule:

vehicle does not include a bicycle or animal that is being ridden.

 

Restricted parking area sign

End restricted parking area sign

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

169   No stopping on a road with a yellow edge line

A driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a continuous yellow edge line.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Edge line is defined in the Dictionary.

Division 3 Stopping at intersections and crossings

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

170   Stopping in or near an intersection

(1)  A driver must not stop in an intersection unless:
(a)  the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules, or
(b)  the intersection is a T-intersection without traffic lights and the driver stops along the continuous side of the continuing road at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Continuing road, intersection and T-intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver must not stop on a road within 20 metres from the nearest point of an intersecting road at an intersection with traffic lights, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance from an intersection if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(3)  A driver must not stop on a road within 10 metres from the nearest point of an intersecting road at an intersection without traffic lights, unless the driver stops:
(a)  at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules, or
(b)  if the intersection is a T-intersection—along the continuous side of the continuing road at the intersection.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Continuing road and T-intersection are defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  For this rule, distances are measured in the direction in which the driver is driving, and:
(a)  for subrule (2)—as shown in example 1, or
(b)  for subrule (3)—as shown in example 2.
(5)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Examples. 

Example 1

Measurement of distance—intersection with traffic lights

Example 2

Measurement of distance—T-intersection without traffic lights

171   Stopping on or near a children’s crossing

(1)  A driver must not stop on a children’s crossing, or on the road within 20 metres before the crossing and 10 metres after the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Children’s crossing is defined in rule 80, and parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a children’s crossing if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2)  For this rule, distances are measured:
(a)  in the direction in which the driver is driving, and
(b)  as shown in example 1 or 2.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Examples. 

Example 1

Measurement of distance—children’s crossing with red and white posts

Example 2

Measurement of distance—children’s crossing with 2 parallel continuous or broken lines

172   Stopping on or near a pedestrian crossing (except at an intersection)

(1)  A driver must not stop on a pedestrian crossing that is not at an intersection, or on the road within 20 metres before the crossing and 10 metres after the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection and parking control sign are defined in the Dictionary, and pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a crossing if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2)  For this rule, distances are measured:
(a)  in the direction in which the driver is driving, and
(b)  as shown in the example.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Example. 

Measurement of distance—pedestrian crossing

173   Stopping on or near a marked foot crossing (except at an intersection)

(1)  A driver must not stop on a marked foot crossing that is not at an intersection, or on the road within 10 metres before the traffic lights pole nearest to the driver at the crossing and 3 metres after the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Intersection, marked foot crossing, parking control sign and traffic lights pole are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a traffic lights pole or a crossing if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2)  For this rule, distances are measured:
(a)  in the direction in which the driver is driving, and
(b)  as shown in the example.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Example. 

Measurement of distance—marked foot crossing

174   Stopping at or near bicycle crossing lights (except at an intersection)

(1)  This rule applies to a place on a road:
(a)  with bicycle crossing lights facing bicycle riders crossing the road, and
(b)  with traffic lights facing traffic travelling on the road, and
(c)  that is not at an intersection.
Note. Bicycle crossing lights, intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver must not stop within 10 metres before the traffic lights nearest to the driver at the place, and 3 metres after the traffic lights, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance from traffic lights if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(3)  For this rule, distances are measured:
(a)  in the direction in which the driver is driving, and
(b)  as shown in the example.
(4)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Example. 

Measurement of distance—bicycle crossing lights

175   Stopping on or near a level crossing

(1)  A driver must not stop on a level crossing, or on a road within 20 metres before the nearest rail or track to the driver approaching the crossing and 20 metres after the nearest rail or track to the driver leaving the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Level crossing is defined in rule 120, and parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a level crossing if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2)  For this rule, distances are measured as shown in the example.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Example. 

Measurement of distance—level crossing

Division 4 Stopping on clearways and freeways and in emergency stopping lanes

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

176   Stopping on a clearway

(1)  A driver must not stop on a length of road to which a clearway sign applies, unless subrule (2) or (3) applies to the driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(1A)  In subrule (1):

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13.
(2)  The driver of a public bus or public minibus may stop on the length of road if the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers.
Note 1. Public bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The term public minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The reference to that term in this subrule is retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road Rules.
(3)  The driver of a taxi may stop on the length of road if:
(a)  the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers, and
(b)  there is not another law of this jurisdiction prohibiting the driver of a taxi from stopping on a length of road to which a clearway sign applies.
Note. Taxi is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  A clearway sign applies, for the days or times indicated on the sign, to a length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:
(a)  a clearway sign on the road that indicates different days or times,
(b)  an end clearway sign on the road,
(c)  the end of the road.
 

Clearway signs

End clearway signs

Note 1 for diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of the clearway sign—see the diagrams in Schedules 2 and 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. Anything on these signs may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

176–1   NSW rule: stopping next to clearway (no stopping) line

(cf RRR, cl 82)

(1)  A driver (other than an authorised driver) must not stop at the side of a road marked with a clearway (no stopping) line unless it is in accordance with a clearway sign applying to that length of road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Rule 176 sets out when a driver may stop on a length of road to which a clearway sign applies.
(2)  A clearway (no stopping) line is a broken longitudinal yellow line marked:
(a)  on the top or side of the kerb of a road, or
(b)  on the carriageway of a road adjacent to the kerb, or
(c)  if there is no kerb, along a lateral boundary of the carriageway.
Note. Carriageway is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

authorised driver means:

(a)  the driver of a bus being used to provide a regular bus service at a bus stop, or
(b)  the driver of a taxi dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(c)  the driver of a postal vehicle engaged in the clearance of mail from a public postbox.

Note 1. Bus, postal vehicle, public postbox, regular bus service and taxi are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

177   Stopping on a freeway

(1)  A driver must not stop on a freeway unless:
(a)  the driver stops in an emergency stopping lane, or
(b)  the driver’s vehicle is permitted to stop on the freeway under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95.
Note 2. Rule 178 sets out when a driver can stop in an emergency stopping lane.
(1–1)  This rule does not apply to:
(a)  the driver of a truck while stopped in a truck parking area, or
(b)  the driver of a public bus used to provide a public passenger service, while stopped:
(i)  in a bus parking area, or
(ii)  in a bus zone or at a bus stop to drop off or pick up passengers, or
(c)  the driver of a vehicle who is authorised to maintain facilities in a bus parking area, while stopped in the bus parking area for that purpose.
Note 1. Bus parking area, public bus, public passenger service, truck and truck parking area are defined in the Dictionary. Bus zone is defined in rule 183 (2). Vehicle is defined in rule 15.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 177 of the Australian Road Rules.
(2)  A freeway is a length of road to which a freeway sign applies.
(3)  A freeway sign on a road applies to a length of road beginning at the sign (including any road into which the length of road merges) and ending at the next end freeway sign on the road.
 

Freeway signs

End freeway sign

Note for diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of each of these signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.

178   Stopping in an emergency stopping lane

A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop in an emergency stopping lane unless:
(a)  the condition of the driver, a passenger or the driver’s vehicle, or any other factor, makes it necessary or desirable for the driver to stop in the emergency stopping lane in the interests of safety, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the circumstances, or
(b)  the driver is permitted to stop in the emergency stopping lane under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle and driver’s vehicle are defined in the Dictionary, and emergency stopping lane is defined in rule 95.

Division 5 Stopping in zones for particular vehicles

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.
Note 3. The signs mentioned in this Division are particular types of parking control sign (defined in the Dictionary) to which the general rules about the application of parking control signs apply—see rules 332 to 335.

179   Stopping in a loading zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a loading zone unless the driver is driving:
(a)  a public bus that is dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(b)  a truck that is dropping off, or picking up, goods, or
(c)  any of the following vehicles:
(i)  a vehicle that a person is getting into or out of or getting on or off,
(ii)  a station wagon or a motor bike that has 3 wheels and is constructed principally for the conveyance of goods,
(iii)  a motor vehicle constructed principally for the conveyance of goods (other than a vehicle referred to in subparagraph (ii)).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Public bus and truck are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (1) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 179 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a driver of specified vehicles to stop in a loading zone. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2)  A driver who is permitted to stop in a loading zone must not stay continuously in the zone for longer than:
(a)  30 minutes, or
(b)  if information on or with the loading zone signs applying to the loading zone indicates another time—the indicated time, or
(c)  for a driver of a vehicle referred to in subrule (1) (c):
(i)  in the case of a vehicle that a person is getting into or out of or getting on or off—the period during which the person is getting into or out of, or on or off, the vehicle, or
(ii)  in the case of a station wagon or a motor bike that has 3 wheels and is constructed principally for the conveyance of goods—the period during which goods are being dropped off or picked up from the vehicle or 15 minutes (whichever is the lesser), or
(iii)  in the case of a motor vehicle constructed principally for the conveyance of goods (other than a vehicle referred to in subparagraph (ii))—the period during which goods are being dropped off or picked up from the vehicle or 30 minutes (whichever is the lesser).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Motor bike, motor vehicle, station wagon and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (2) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 179 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to specify the period during which the driver of a vehicle permitted to stop in loading zones may stop in such zones. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(3)  A loading zone is a length of a road to which a loading zone sign applies.
(3–1)  This rule does not apply to a driver who stops a goods vehicle in a ticket-operated loading zone.
Note 1. Goods vehicle and ticket-operated loading zone are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 179–1 makes special provision for goods vehicles stopping in ticket-operated loading zones.
Note 3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 179 of the Australian Road Rules.
 

Loading zone sign

Note 1 for diagram. There is another permitted version of the loading zone sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagram. A loading zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

179–1   NSW rule: stopping in ticket-operated loading zone

(cf RRR, cl 77)

(1)  A driver must not stop a goods vehicle in a ticket-operated loading zone unless a current loading zone ticket is displayed in a manner that makes its date and expiry time clearly visible to persons outside the vehicle:
(a)  in or on the front left-hand portion of the vehicle, or
(b)  if a different portion is specified in the ticket in relation to a particular class of vehicles, in or on such portion of the vehicle as is so specified.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Goods vehicle and loading zone ticket are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A ticket-operated loading zone is a length of road to which a loading zone sign applies where information on or with the sign includes the word “TICKET”.
Note. With is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A driver does not commit an offence under subrule (1) if the driver:
(a)  stops a goods vehicle in a ticket-operated loading zone before obtaining a loading zone ticket, so long as the person obtains and displays a current loading zone ticket in accordance with this rule immediately after stopping the vehicle, or
(b)  is driving a vehicle that is actually engaged in dropping off, or picking up, passengers.
(4)  A driver must not display more than one loading zone ticket at any one time in or on a goods vehicle that is stopped in a ticket-operated loading zone.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  The driver of a goods vehicle must not allow the vehicle to remain stopped in a ticket-operated loading zone after the expiry of the loading zone ticket displayed in or on the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(6)  The driver of a goods vehicle must not replace a loading zone ticket in or on the vehicle (whether or not either of the expiry times shown on the ticket has been reached) with a fresh loading zone ticket for the purpose of allowing the vehicle to remain stopped in the ticket-operated loading zone after the expiry time specified in the first loading zone ticket for the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under clause 121A of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 if he or she defaces or otherwise interferes with a loading zone ticket machine or loading zone ticket.
(7)  A driver must not stop in a ticket-operated loading zone that is closed.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Clause 121B of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 enables the Authority to temporarily close a ticket-operated loading zone by erecting a sign to that effect in, or in close proximity to, the zone.
(8)  This rule prevails over any other parking restrictions that apply within a ticket-operated loading zone, and those restrictions do not apply, and may not be enforced, in respect of a goods vehicle that is stopped in such a zone in accordance with this rule.
 

Loading zone sign

Note 1 for diagram. There is another permitted version of the loading zone sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagram. A loading zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

180   Stopping in a truck zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a truck zone unless the driver is driving:
(a)  a truck that is dropping off, or picking up, goods, or
(b)  a motor vehicle that is dropping off, or picking up, passengers.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Motor vehicle and truck are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (1) (b) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 180 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a driver of vehicle to stop in a truck zone. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2)  A truck zone is a length of a road to which a truck zone sign applies.
 

Truck zone sign

Note for diagram. A truck zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

181   Stopping in a works zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a works zone unless the driver is driving a vehicle that is:
(a)  engaged in construction work in or near the zone, or
(b)  dropping off, or picking up, passengers.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Subrule (1) (b) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 181 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit the driver of a vehicle to stop in a works zone. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2)  A works zone is a length of a road to which a works zone sign applies.
 

Works zone sign

Note 1 for diagram. There is another permitted version of this sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagram. A works zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

182   Stopping in a taxi zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a taxi zone, unless the driver is driving a taxi.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Taxi is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A taxi zone is a length of a road to which a taxi zone sign applies.
 

Taxi zone sign

Note 1 for diagram. There is another permitted version of this sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagram. A taxi zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

183   Stopping in a bus zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a bus zone unless the driver is driving a public bus (except a public bus of a kind that is not permitted to stop in the bus zone by information on or with the bus zone sign applying to the bus zone) that is:
(a)  dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(b)  stopping for the purposes of a regular bus service.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Public bus, regular bus service and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 183 of the Australian Road Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2)  A bus zone is a length of a road to which a bus zone sign applies.
 

Bus zone sign

Note 1 for diagram. There is another permitted version of the bus zone sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagram. A bus zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

184   Stopping in a minibus zone

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a public minibus) must not stop in a minibus zone.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Public minibus is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A minibus zone is a length of road to which a minibus zone sign applies.
Note. Minibus zones are not used in this jurisdiction because the term public minibus is not used in this jurisdiction. This rule is retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road Rules.
 

Minibus zone sign

Note for diagram. A minibus zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

185   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 185 (Stopping in a permit zone) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

186   Stopping in a mail zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a mail zone.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A mail zone is a length of a road to which a mail zone sign applies.
Note. Exemptions for drivers of postal vehicles may be provided under rule 313.
 

Mail zone sign

Note for diagram. A mail zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

Division 6 Other places where stopping is restricted

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

187   Stopping in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, tramway, transit lane, truck lane or on tram tracks

(1)  A driver must not stop in a bus lane, transit lane or truck lane unless the driver:
(a)  is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is dropping off or picking up, passengers, and
(b)  is permitted to drive in the lane under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A driver must not stop in a bicycle lane unless:
(a)  the driver:
(i)  is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is dropping off or picking up, passengers, and
(ii)  is permitted to drive in the lane under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction, or
(b)  the driver is permitted to stop or park in the bicycle lane under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a public bus) must not stop in a tram lane, a tramway or on tram tracks.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle lane is defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined in rule 154, tram lane is defined in rule 155, tramway is defined in rule 155A, transit lane is defined in rule 156, truck lane is defined in rule 157, and public bus, taxi, tram and tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The term public minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The reference to that term in this rule is retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road Rules.
Note 3. Rule 76 deals with drivers keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes or on tram tracks marked on each side by a yellow line.
Note 4. Part 11, Division 6 deals with driving in bicycle lanes, bus lanes, tram lanes, tramways, transit lanes and truck lanes.

188   Stopping in a shared zone

A driver must not stop in a shared zone unless:
(a)  the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules, or
(b)  the driver stops in a parking bay and the driver is permitted to stop in the parking bay under these Rules, or
(c)  the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods, or
(d)  the driver is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Parking bay and parking control sign are defined in the Dictionary, and shared zone is defined in rule 24.

189   Double parking

(1)  A driver must not stop on a road if to do so would put any part of the vehicle that he or she is driving between a vehicle that is parked on the road and the centre of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. One-way road and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Double parked on a two-way road without a dividing line

Example 2

Double parked on two-way road with a centre dividing line

Example 3

Double parked on the right side of a one-way road with no vehicles parked on the left side of the road

Example 4

Double parked on the left side of a one-way road with other vehicles lawfully parked on the right side of the road

In the examples, the vehicle marked with an “X” is stopped in contravention of this rule.

(2)  A driver does not contravene this rule by parking on the side of the road, or in a median strip parking area, in accordance with rule 210.
Note. Median strip parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

In the example, the angle-parked vehicles are not stopped in contravention of this rule.

190   Stopping in or near a safety zone

(1)  A driver must not stop in a safety zone, or on a road within 10 metres before or after a safety zone, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance before or after something if the driver stops so any part of the vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2)  For this rule, distances are measured:
(a)  in the direction in which the driver is driving, and
(b)  from the end of the structure, and
(c)  as shown in the example.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road-related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
 

Safety zone sign

Example. 

Measurement of distance—safety zone

In the example, the vehicles marked with an “X” are stopped in contravention of this rule.

191   Stopping near an obstruction

A driver must not stop on a road near an obstruction on the road in a position that obstructs traffic on the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Obstruction is defined in the Dictionary.

192   Stopping on a bridge or in a tunnel etc

(1)  A driver must not stop on a bridge, causeway, ramp or similar structure unless:
(a)  the road is at least as wide on the structure as it is on each of the approaches, or
(b)  the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver must not stop in a tunnel or underpass unless:
(a)  the road is at least as wide in the tunnel or underpass as it is on each of the approaches, or
(b)  the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Example. 

Stopping on a bridge where the road on the bridge is narrower than on an approach

In the example, the vehicle is stopped in contravention of subrule (1).

193   Stopping on a crest or curve outside a built-up area

(1)  A driver must not stop on or near a crest or curve on a length of road that is not in a built-up area unless:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle is visible for 100 metres to drivers approaching the vehicle and travelling in the direction of travel of traffic on the same side of the road as the vehicle, or
(b)  the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Built-up area, driver’s vehicle and parking control sign are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

194   Stopping near a fire hydrant etc

(1)  A driver must not stop within 1 metre of a fire hydrant, fire hydrant indicator, or fire plug indicator, unless:
(a)  the driver is driving a public bus, and the driver stops at a bus stop or in a bus zone and does not leave the bus unattended, or
(b)  the driver is driving a taxi, and the driver stops in a taxi zone and does not leave the taxi unattended, or
(c)  the driver is driving a public minibus, and the driver stops in a minibus zone and does not leave the minibus unattended.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bus zone is defined in rule 183, public bus and taxi are defined in the Dictionary, minibus zone is defined in rule 184, and taxi zone is defined in rule 182.
Note 2. Neither minibus zones nor the term public minibus are used in this jurisdiction. The references to those terms in this subrule are retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road Rules.
(2)  For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver leaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3 metres from the closest point of the vehicle.
(3)  In this rule:

fire hydrant means an upright pipe with a spout, nozzle or other outlet for drawing water from a main or service pipe in case of fire or other emergency.

Examples. 

Fire hydrant indicators

Fire plug indicator

195   Stopping at or near a bus stop

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not stop at a bus stop, or on the road, within 20 metres before a sign on the road that indicates the bus stop, and 10 metres after the sign, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign and public bus are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance before or after a sign indicating a bus stop if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(1–1)  A driver of a public bus must not stop at a bus stop, or on the road, within 20 metres before a sign on the road that indicates the bus stop, and 10 metres after the sign, unless the driver:
(a)  is dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(b)  is stopping for the purposes of a regular bus service, or
(c)  stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign, public bus and regular bus service are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 195 of the Australian Road Rules.
(2)  For this rule, distances are measured in the direction in which the driver is driving.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

196   Stopping at or near a tram stop

(1)  A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a public bus travelling along tram tracks) must not stop at a tram stop or on the road within 20 metres before a sign that indicates a tram stop, unless:
(a)  the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies, and
(b)  the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign, public bus, tram and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops within a particular distance before a sign indicating a tram stop if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2)  For this rule, the distance is measured in the direction in which the driver is driving.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

197   Stopping on a path, dividing strip, nature strip or painted island

(1)  A driver must not stop on a bicycle path, footpath, shared path or dividing strip, or a nature strip adjacent to a length of road in a built-up area, unless:
(a)  the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules, or
(b)  the driver is permitted to stop under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle path is defined in rule 239, built-up area, dividing strip, footpath, nature strip and parking control sign are defined in the Dictionary, and shared path is defined in rule 242.
Note 2. A separated footpath is a particular kind of footpath—see rule 239.
(1A)  A driver must not stop on a painted island.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Painted island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 85 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a turning lane from a painted island and rule 138 deals with keeping off painted islands.
(2)  Subrule (1) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.
Note. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.

198   Obstructing access to and from a footpath, driveway etc

(1)  A driver must not stop on a road in a position that obstructs access by vehicles or pedestrians to or from a footpath ramp or a similar way of access to a footpath, or a bicycle path or passageway unless:
(a)  the driver is driving a public bus that is dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(b)  the driver stops in a parking bay and the driver is permitted to stop in the parking bay under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle path is defined in rule 239, and footpath, parking bay and public bus are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A driver must not stop on or across a driveway or other way of access for vehicles travelling to or from adjacent land unless:
(a)  the driver:
(i)  is dropping off, or picking up, passengers, and
(ii)  does not leave the vehicle unattended, and
(iii)  completes the dropping off, or picking up, of the passengers, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case, within 2 minutes after stopping, or
(b)  the driver stops in a parking bay and the driver is permitted to stop in the parking bay under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Adjacent land is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A driver stops on or across a driveway or way of access if any part of the vehicle is on or across the driveway or way of access—see rule 350.
Example. 

Blocking a driveway

In the example, the vehicle marked with an “X” is stopped in contravention of subrule (2).

(3)  For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver leaves the vehicle so that the driver is over 3 metres from the closest point of the vehicle.

199   Stopping near a postbox

(1)  A driver must not stop on a road within 3 metres of a public postbox, unless the driver:
(a)  is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or mail, or
(b)  stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Parking control sign and public postbox are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 199 (2) of the Australian Road Rules, which contains a definition of public postbox, has not been reproduced in these Rules. The definition in the Australian Road Rules allows the term to be defined in another law of this jurisdiction. Accordingly, a definition of the term is set out in the Dictionary.

200   Stopping on roads—heavy and long vehicles

(1)  The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a length of road that is not in a built-up area, except on the shoulder of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Built-up area is defined in the Dictionary, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
(2)  The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour, unless the driver is permitted to stop on the length of road for longer than 1 hour by information on or with a traffic control device, or under subrule (2A), (2A–1) or (2A–2).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Traffic control device and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (2) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 200 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a driver of a heavy vehicle or long vehicle to stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2A)  The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, other than a bus, is permitted to stop on a length of road in a built up area for longer than 1 hour if, throughout the period when the vehicle is stopped on the length of road, the driver is engaged in dropping off, or picking up, goods.
(2A–1)  The driver of a heavy vehicle, or a long vehicle, is permitted to stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour if:
(a)  the driver is carrying out functions under the road transport legislation, or
(b)  the driver is complying with a direction given by a police officer or other person carrying out functions under the road transport legislation, or
(c)  the heavy vehicle or long vehicle is a bus.
Note 1. Bus and road transport legislation are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 200 of the Australian Road Rules.
(2A–2)  The driver of a heavy vehicle, or a long vehicle, is permitted to stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour if the vehicle is stopped for a purpose that is ancillary to or connected with the lawful carrying out of a filming project (within the meaning of the Local Government Act 1993) that is approved under that Act.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 200 of the Australian Road Rules.
(3)  In this rule:

heavy vehicle means a vehicle with a GVM of 4.5 tonnes or more.

long vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or projection, is 7.5 metres long, or longer.

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note 1. GVM is defined in the Act, road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).

201   Stopping on a road with bicycle parking sign

A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop on a length of road to which a bicycle parking sign applies, unless the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Bicycle parking sign

Note for diagram. Anything on this sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

202   Stopping on a road with motor bike parking sign

A driver (except the rider of a motor bike) must not stop on a length of road to which a motor bike parking sign applies, unless the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Motor bike is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Motor bike parking sign

Note for diagram. Anything on this sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

203   Stopping in a parking area for people with disabilities

(1)  A driver must not stop in a parking area for people with disabilities unless:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle displays a current parking permit for people with disabilities, and
(b)  the driver complies with the conditions of use of the permit.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle and parking permit for people with disabilities are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A parking area for people with disabilities is a length or area of a road:
(a)  to which a permissive parking sign displaying a people with disabilities symbol applies, or
(b)  to which a people with disabilities parking sign applies, or
(c)  indicated by a road marking (a people with disabilities road marking) that consists of, or includes, a people with disabilities symbol.
 

People with disabilities symbols

Permissive parking sign displaying a people with disabilities symbol

(for a length of road)

Permissive parking sign displaying a people with disabilities symbol

(for an area)

People with disabilities parking sign

Note for diagrams. Anything on these signs may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).

203A   Stopping in a slip lane

A driver must not stop in a slip lane unless:
(a)  a parking control sign applies to the place where the driver stops, and
(b)  the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Parking control sign and slip lane are defined in the Dictionary.

Division 7 Permissive parking signs and parking fees

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

204   Meaning of certain information on or with permissive parking signs

(1)  This rule explains the meaning of certain information on or with a permissive parking sign applying to a length of road or an area.
Note. With is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Permissive parking sign

(for a length of road)

Permissive parking sign

(for an area)

Permissive parking sign

(for a length of road)

Note 1 for diagrams. There is another permitted version of a permissive parking sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for diagrams. A permissive parking sign may have an arrow pointing in a different direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule 316 (4).
Note. Rule 318 (1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or with a traffic control device (including a permissive parking sign) that limits the application of the device to particular times or days. Under rule 318 (3), if the information indicates that the device applies on a particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not have effect on a Friday that is a public holiday unless otherwise stated.
(2)  A whole number, fraction, or whole number and fraction, immediately to the left of the letter “P” indicates that a driver must not park on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for longer than the period of hours, or fraction of an hour, equal to the number, fraction, or number and fraction, shown.
Examples of permissive parking signs showing permitted parking periods and times of operation. 

Example 1

Permissive parking sign applying to a length of road with a whole number to the left of P

Example 2

Permissive parking sign applying to an area with a whole number to the left of P

In example 1, the sign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for longer than 1 hour on Saturdays between 9 am and 12 noon.

In example 2, the sign indicates that a driver must not park in the area for longer than 2 hours on Mondays to Fridays between 8.30 am and 5 pm, and on Saturdays between 8.30 am and 12 noon, unless permitted by information on or with another traffic control device.

(3)  A number, together with the word “minute”, immediately to the right of the letter “P” indicate that a driver must not park on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for longer than the number of minutes shown.
Example. 

Example 3

Permissive parking sign with a number of minutes to the right of P

In this example, the sign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for longer than 5 minutes on Mondays to Fridays between 9 am and 4 pm.

(4)  The word “parking”, together with words indicating a number of hours or minutes, indicate that a driver must not park on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for longer than the number of hours or minutes shown.

205   Parking for longer than indicated

(1)  A driver must not park continuously on a length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies for longer than the period indicated by information on or with the sign or, if rule 206 applies to the driver, the period allowed under that rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. With is defined in the Dictionary.
(1A)  If a permissive parking sign does not indicate a period and does not indicate that it applies at particular times, or at particular times on particular days, a driver may, at any time, park continuously on a length of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies, unless:
(a)  another parking control sign applies to the length of road or area, and
(b)  the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in the area, under these Rules.
Note. Parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  For subrule (1), a driver parks continuously on a length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies, from the time when the driver parks on the length of road, or in the area, until the driver, or another driver, moves the vehicle off the length of road, or out of the area, to which the permissive parking sign applies.

205A   Parking outside times indicated

If a permissive parking sign indicates that it applies at particular times, or at particular times on particular days, a driver may park on the length of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies at a time, or at a time on a day, when the sign does not apply, unless:
(a)  another parking control sign applies to the length of road or area, and
(b)  the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in the area, at that time, or at that time on that day, under these Rules.
Note 1. Parking control sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 318 (1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or with a traffic control device (including a permissive parking sign) that limits the application of the device to particular times or days. Under rule 318 (3), if the information indicates that the device applies on a particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not have effect on a Friday that is a public holiday at the place where the device is located, unless otherwise stated.

205A–1   NSW rule: parking in special event parking areas

(cf RRR, cl 79)

(1)  A driver must not park continuously in a special event parking area for longer than the period indicated by information on or with the special event parking area signs for the area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. With is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A special event parking area is the network of roads in an area with:
(a)  a special event parking area sign on each road into the area, and
(b)  an end special event parking area sign on each road out of the area.
(3)  A whole number, fraction, or whole number and fraction, immediately to the left of the letter “P” on a special event parking area sign indicates that a driver must not park in the area continuously for longer than the period of hours, or fraction of an hour, equal to the number, fraction, or number and fraction, shown.
Note. Rule 318 (1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or with a traffic control device (including a special event parking area sign) that limits the application of the device to particular times or days. Under rule 318 (3), if the information indicates that the device applies on a particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not have effect on a Friday that is a public holiday unless otherwise stated.
(4)  In subrule (2) (a) and (b):

road does not include a road related area.

(5)  Subrule (1) does not apply to the driver of a vehicle in any of the following circumstances:
(a)  if the vehicle is a public utility service vehicle,
(b)  if the vehicle:
(i)  is the subject of a current special event parking permit, and
(ii)  is parked in accordance with the terms of the permit, and
(iii)  in the case of a printed parking permit—is displaying the permit,
(c)  if the vehicle is actually dropping off or picking up passengers or goods.
Note. Printed parking permit and public utility service vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  This rule does not affect any other parking restrictions that apply within a special event parking area, and those restrictions continue to apply, and may be enforced, accordingly.
(7)  In this rule:

driver does not include the rider of a bicycle or an animal.

special event parking permit means a permit of the kind referred to in clause 124 (2) (e) of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.

 

Special event parking area sign

End special event parking area sign

Note for diagrams. A special event parking area sign or end special event parking sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

206   Time extension for people with disabilities

(1)  This rule applies to a driver if:
(a)  the driver’s vehicle displays a current parking permit for people with disabilities, and
(a–1)  in the case of a permit that is a mobility parking scheme authority—the driver’s vehicle is being used for:
(a)  the conveyance of the disabled person to whom the authority was issued, or
(b)  the conveyance of disabled persons by the organisation to which the authority was issued, and
(b)  the driver complies with the conditions of use of the permit.
Note 1. Disabled person, driver’s vehicle, mobility parking scheme authority and parking permit for people with disabilities are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Paragraph (a–1) is an additional NSW paragraph. There is no corresponding paragraph in rule 206 of the Australian Road Rules.
Note 3. Division 2 of Part 6 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 provides for the issue of, and conditions of use for, mobility parking scheme authorities.
(2)  The driver may park continuously on a length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies (except in a parking area for people with disabilities) for:
(a)  twice the period indicated on the sign, or
(b)  if the permit displayed on the driver’s vehicle is a mobility parking scheme authority:
(i)  30 minutes, if the maximum period indicated on the sign is less than 30 minutes, or
(ii)  2 hours, if the maximum period indicated on the sign is 30 minutes, or
(iii)  an unlimited period of time, if the maximum period indicated on the sign is more than 30 minutes.
Note 1. Parking area for people with disabilities is defined in rule 203.
Note 2. Subrule (2) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 206 of the Australian Road Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2–1)  This rule applies to a disabled person to whom an interstate or overseas authority has been issued in the same way as it applies to a person to whom a mobility parking scheme authority has been issued.
(2–2)  In this rule:

interstate or overseas authority has the same meaning as in Division 2 of Part 6 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.

Note. Subrules (2–1) and (2–2) are additional NSW subrules. There are no corresponding subrules in rule 206 of the Australian Road Rules.

207   Parking where fees are payable

(1)  This rule applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that a fee is payable for parking by buying a ticket or putting money into a parking meter.
Note. With is defined in the dictionary.
(2)  The driver must:
(a)  pay the fee (if any) payable under the law of this jurisdiction, and
(b)  obey any instructions on or with the sign, meter, ticket or ticket-vending machine.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2–1)  Subrule (2) does not apply to:
(a)  the driver of a vehicle displaying a mobility parking scheme authority if:
(i)  the authority is in force, and
(ii)  the conditions of the authority are complied with, and
(iii)  the vehicle is parked in accordance with rule 206, or
(b)  a driver parking in a pay parking area.
Note 1. Mobility parking scheme authority and pay parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Part 4 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 makes provision for the administration of pay parking schemes (including the designation of pay parking areas and the fixing of fees by parking authorities).
Note 3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 207 of the Australian Road Rules. Rules 207–1 to 207–9 make provision for parking in pay parking areas.

207–1   NSW rule: parking in metered parking areas

(cf RRR, cl 61)

(1)  A driver must not park in a metered parking area unless the driver’s vehicle is parked in a metered parking space.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A metered parking area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the word “METER”.
Note. Parking area and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A metered parking space is a parking bay in a metered parking area that is indicated by:
(a)  studs, pads, plates or strips, and
(b)  in the case of a space controlled by a multi-space parking meter— the number for the space and an arrow in or adjacent to the space indicating the direction of the meter.
Note. Parking bay is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  A driver must not park in a metered parking space without paying the relevant parking fee for the space for at least the minimum period of time for which parking in the space must be paid for.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Relevant parking fee is defined in the Dictionary.
(5)  A driver does not contravene subrule (4) if:
(a)  the driver parks in a metered parking space before paying the relevant parking fee, so long as the person pays the fee immediately after parking, or
(b)  when the driver parks in a metered parking space, the parking meter for the metered parking space is displaying unexpired time.
Note. Parking meter is defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a metered parking space if the parking meter for the space indicates that the period of time for which parking in the space has been paid for has expired.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(7)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a metered parking space for more than the period of time indicated on or with the permissive parking sign or signs that designate the space as the maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the space.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(8)  A driver who parks in a metered parking space does not contravene this rule if:
(a)  the space is within another kind of pay parking area and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of pay parking area concerned, or
(b)  the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any) for which no fee is payable for parking in the space, or
(c)  the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the space, or
(d)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility parking scheme authority, or
(e)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current printed parking permit while it is parked in the space and the space is located on a length of road or in an area specified in the permit and the space is designated for use by the holder of the permit, or
(f)  an electronic parking permit is currently in force with respect to the driver’s vehicle while it is parked in the space and the space is located on a length of road or in an area specified in the permit and the space is designated for use by the holder of the permit.
Note. Controlled parking hours, electronic parking permit, mobility parking scheme authority, pay parking area and printed parking permit are defined in the Dictionary.
(9)  A driver who parks in a metered parking space does not contravene this rule if the parking meter for the space is inoperable (except if the driver parks in contravention of subrule (7)).
(10)  In this rule:

multi-space parking meter means a parking meter that applies to more than one metered parking space.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–2   NSW rule: parking in metered parking spaces

(cf RRR, cl 62)

A driver must not park in a metered parking space:
(a)  while any other vehicle is parked in the space, or
(b)  in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the markings for the space.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Metered parking space is defined in rule 207–1.
Note 2. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under clauses 100 and 100A of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 if he or she misuses or damages a parking meter.
Note 3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–3   NSW rule: parking in ticket parking areas

(cf RRR, cl 66)

(1)  A driver must not park in a ticket parking area unless a current parking ticket is displayed, in such a manner that its date and expiry time are clearly visible to persons outside the driver’s vehicle:
(a)  in or on the front left-hand portion of the vehicle, or
(b)  if a different portion is specified in the ticket in relation to a particular class of vehicles—in or on such portion of the vehicle as is so specified.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle and parking ticket are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A ticket parking area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the word “TICKET”, but does not include any part of the parking area in which the parking of vehicles is prohibited by another provision of these Rules.
Note. Parking area and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A driver does not contravene subrule (1) if the driver parks in a ticket parking area before obtaining a parking ticket, so long as the driver obtains and displays a current parking ticket in accordance with this rule immediately after parking the driver’s vehicle.
(4)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a ticket parking area after the expiry of the parking ticket displayed in or on the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a ticket parking area for more than the period of time indicated on or with the permissive parking signs that designate the area as the maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(6)  A driver who parks in a ticket parking area does not contravene this rule if:
(a)  the area is, or forms part of, another kind of pay parking area and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of pay parking area concerned, or
(b)  the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any) for which no fee is payable for parking in the area, or
(c)  the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the area, or
(d)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility parking scheme authority, or
(e)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current printed parking permit while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder of the permit, or
(f)  an electronic parking permit is currently in force with respect to the driver’s vehicle while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder of the permit.
Note. Controlled parking hours, electronic parking permit, mobility parking scheme authority, pay parking area and printed parking permit are defined in the Dictionary.
(7)  Nothing in this rule prevents a driver from parking in different parts of the same ticket parking area while displaying the same parking ticket.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–4   NSW rule: parking in ticket parking spaces

(cf RRR, cl 67)

(1)  A driver must not park in any ticket parking space:
(a)  while any other vehicle is parked in the space, or
(b)  in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the markings for the space.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under clauses 102 and 103 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 if he or she misuses or damages a parking ticket or ticket machine.
(2)  A ticket parking space is a parking bay in a ticket parking area that is indicated by studs, pads, plates or strips.
Note 1. Parking bay is defined in the Dictionary, and ticket parking area is defined in rule 207–3.
Note 2. Most ticket parking areas do not have specially designated ticket parking spaces.
Note 3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–5   NSW rule: parking in coupon parking areas

(cf RRR, cl 71)

(1)  A driver must not park in a coupon parking area unless a current parking coupon is displayed, in such a manner that its date and expiry time are clearly visible to persons outside the driver’s vehicle:
(a)  in or on the front left-hand portion of the vehicle, or
(b)  if a different portion is specified in the coupon in relation to a particular class of vehicles—in or on such portion of the vehicle as is so specified.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle and parking coupon are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A coupon parking area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the word “COUPON”, but does not include any part of the parking area in which the parking of vehicles is prohibited by another provision of these Rules.
Note. Parking area and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A driver does not contravene subrule (1) if the driver parks in a coupon parking area before obtaining a parking coupon, so long as the driver obtains and displays a current parking coupon in accordance with this rule immediately after parking the driver’s vehicle.
(4)  A driver must not display more than 3 parking coupons at any one time in or on the driver’s vehicle when it is parked in a coupon parking area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a coupon parking area after the expiry of the parking coupons displayed in or on the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(6)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a coupon parking area for more than the period of time indicated on or with the permissive parking signs that designate the area as the maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(7)  A driver who parks in a coupon parking area does not contravene this rule if:
(a)  the area is, or forms part of, another kind of pay parking area and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of pay parking area concerned, or
(b)  the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any) for which a coupon is not required for parking in the area, or
(c)  the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the area, or
(d)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility parking scheme authority, or
(e)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current printed parking permit while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder of the permit, or
(f)  an electronic parking permit is currently in force with respect to the driver’s vehicle while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder of the permit.
Note. Controlled parking hours, electronic parking permit, mobility parking scheme authority, pay parking area and printed parking permit are defined in the Dictionary.
(8)  Nothing in this rule prevents a driver from parking in different parts of the same coupon parking area while displaying the same parking coupon.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–6   NSW rule: parking in coupon parking spaces

(cf RRR, cl 72)

(1)  A driver must not park in any coupon parking space:
(a)  while any other vehicle is parked in the space, or
(b)  in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the markings for the space.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under clause 108 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 if he or she misuses or damages a parking coupon.
(2)  A coupon parking space is a parking bay in a coupon parking area that is indicated by studs, pads, plates or strips.
Note 1. Parking bay is defined in the Dictionary, and coupon parking area is defined in rule 207–5.
Note 2. Most coupon parking areas do not have specially designated coupon parking spaces.
Note 3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–7   NSW rule: parking in temporarily closed pay parking areas and spaces

(cf RRR, cll 63, 68 and 73)

A driver must not park in a pay parking area or a pay parking space that is closed under the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Pay parking area and pay parking space are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Clauses 100B, 103A , 109 and 111C of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 enable parking authorities to temporarily close pay parking areas or spaces that have been designated by such authorities by erecting signs to that effect in, or in close proximity to, the areas or spaces concerned.

207–8   NSW rule: parking in phone parking areas

(1)  A driver must not park in a phone parking area without paying the relevant parking fee for the area:
(a)  for at least the minimum period of time for which parking in the area must be paid for, and
(b)  using a phone payment scheme (within the meaning of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Relevant parking fee is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A phone parking area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the phrase “PHONE”, but does not include any part of the parking area in which the parking of vehicles is prohibited by another provision of these Rules.
Note. Parking area and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A driver does not contravene subrule (1) if the driver parks in a phone parking area before paying the relevant parking fee, so long as the person pays the fee using a phone payment scheme immediately after parking.
(4)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a phone parking area if the period for which the driver has paid to park in the area using a phone payment scheme has expired.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(5)  A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a phone parking area for more than the period of time indicated on or with the permissive parking signs that designate the area as the maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the area.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(6)  A driver who parks in a phone parking area does not contravene this rule if:
(a)  the area is, or forms part of, another kind of pay parking area and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of pay parking area concerned, or
(b)  the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any) for which no fee is payable for parking in the area, or
(c)  the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the area, or
(d)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility parking scheme authority, or
(e)  the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current parking permit while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder of the permit.
Note 1. Controlled parking hours, mobility parking scheme authority, parking permit and pay parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

207–9   NSW rule: parking in phone parking spaces

(1)  A driver must not park in any phone parking space:
(a)  while any other vehicle is parked in the space, or
(b)  in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the markings for the space.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A phone parking space is a parking bay in a phone parking area that is indicated by studs, pads, plates or strips.
Note 1. Parking bay is defined in the Dictionary, and phone parking area is defined in rule 207–8.
Note 2. Most phone parking areas do not have specially designated phone parking spaces.
Note 3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

Division 8 Parallel parking

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

208   Parallel parking on a road (except in a median strip parking area)

(1)  A driver who parks on a road (except in a median strip parking area) must position the driver’s vehicle in accordance with subrules (2) to (8).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle and median strip parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The driver must position the vehicle to face:
(a)  in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line of traffic on, or next to, the part of the road where the driver parks, or
(b)  if there is no traffic on, or next to, that part of the road—in the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the road.
Note. Marked lane is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If the road is a two-way road, the driver must position the vehicle parallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left side of the road.
Note. Two-way road is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  If the road is a one-way road, the driver must position the vehicle parallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left or far right side of the road, unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a parking control sign.
Note. One-way road, parking control sign and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(5)  If the driver does not park in a parking bay, the driver must position the vehicle at least 1 metre from the closest point of any vehicle in front of it and any vehicle behind it.
Note. Parking bay is defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  If the road has a continuous dividing line or a dividing strip, the driver must position the vehicle at least 3 metres from the continuous dividing line or dividing strip, unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a parking control sign.
Note. Dividing line and dividing strip are defined in the Dictionary.
(7)  If the road does not have a continuous dividing line or a dividing strip, the driver must position the vehicle so there is at least 3 metres of the road alongside the vehicle that is clear for other vehicles to pass, unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a parking control sign.
(8)  The driver must position the vehicle so the vehicle does not unreasonably obstruct the path of other vehicles or pedestrians.
(9)  This rule does not apply to:
(a)  a driver if the driver parks on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign or road marking applies, and information on or with the sign or road marking includes the words “angle parking” or “angle”, or
(b)  the rider of a motor bike if the rider parks the motor bike on a length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies and the sign indicates that the length of road or area is for parking motor bikes.
Note 1. Motor bike and road marking are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Division 9 deals with angle parking.
(10)  Subrules (3) and (4) do not apply to the rider of a motor bike if the rider positions the motor bike so at least 1 wheel is as near as practicable to the far left or far right side of the road.
(11)  If a road has one or more service roads, the part of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles, and each service road, is taken to be a separate road for this rule.
Note. Part of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles and service road are defined in the Dictionary.
(12)  In this rule:

continuous dividing line means:

(a)  a single continuous dividing line only, or
(b)  a single continuous dividing line to the left or right of a broken dividing line, or
(c)  2 parallel continuous dividing lines.

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Example. 

Parallel parking—minimum distance from other vehicles and dividing strip

In the example, the vehicles marked with an “X” are parked in contravention of this rule.

208A   Parallel parking in a road related area (except in a median strip parking area)

(1)  A driver who parks in a road related area (except in a median strip parking area) must position the driver’s vehicle to face:
(a)  in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line of traffic next to the part of the road related area where the driver parks, or
(b)  if there is no traffic next to that part of the road related area—in the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel in the road related area, or
(c)  if the road related area is an area that divides a road—either:
(i)  in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line of traffic to the left of the driver, or
(ii)  if there is no traffic to the left of the driver—in the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver’s vehicle, line of traffic, marked lane and median strip parking area are defined in the Dictionary and road related area is defined in rule 13.
(2)  Subrule (1) does not apply if:
(a)  another law of this jurisdiction permits the driver to park in another manner in the road related area, or
(b)  signs or road markings indicate that angle parking is required in the road related area.

209   Parallel parking in a median strip parking area

(1)  This rule applies to a driver who parks in a median strip parking area if a parking control sign or road marking applies to the area, and information on or with the sign or road marking indicates that the driver’s vehicle must be positioned parallel to the median strip.
Note. Driver’s vehicle, median strip, median strip parking area, parking control sign, road marking and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The driver must position the driver’s vehicle:
(a)  to face:
(i)  in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line of traffic to the left of the driver, or
(ii)  if there is no traffic to the left of the driver—in the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the road, and
(b)  parallel, and as near as practicable, to the centre of the median strip, and
(c)  if the driver does not park in a parking bay—at least 1 metre from the closest point of any vehicle in front of it and any vehicle behind it.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked lane and parking bay are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike.
Note. Motor bike is defined in the Dictionary.

Division 9 Angle parking

Note 1. Park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

210   Angle parking

(1)  If a driver parks in a parking area on the side of a road, or in a median strip parking area:
(a)  to which a parking control sign with the words “angle parking” or “angle” applies, or
(b)  to which a road marking indicating an angle applies,
      the driver must position the driver’s vehicle in accordance with subrules (2) to (4).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle, median strip parking area, parking area, parking control sign, road marking and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 212 deals with whether a driver enters a median strip parking area forwards or in reverse.
(2)  If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at a specified angle (other than 90°), the driver must position the vehicle:
(a)  so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to the specified angle, and
(b)  if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the rear of the vehicle nearest to the centre of the road.
(2A)  If the parking control sign or road marking does not indicate the angle at which the vehicle must be positioned, the driver must position the vehicle:
(a)  so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to 45°, as shown in example 1 or 2, and
(b)  if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the rear of the vehicle nearest to the centre of the road.
Examples. 

Example 1

Parking at 45° at the side of a two-way road

Example 2

Parking at 45° at the right side of a one-way road

(2B)  Subrules (2) and (2A) do not apply if the road marking, or information on the parking control sign, includes the words “rear in” or similar words.
(3)  If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at an angle of 90°, the driver:
(a)  must position the driver’s vehicle so the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to 90°, as shown in example 3 or 4, and
(b)  if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road:
(i)  if the road marking, or information on the parking control sign, includes the words “rear in” or “front in”, or similar words—must position the vehicle so that the front of the vehicle is nearest the centre of the road, or the rear of the vehicle is nearest the centre of the road, in accordance with the road marking or sign, or
(ii)  otherwise—may position the vehicle either way around.
Examples. 

Example 3

Parking at 90° at the side of a two-way road

Example 4

Parking at 90° at the right side of a one-way road

(4)  If the road marking, or information on the parking control sign, includes the words “rear in”, or similar words, the driver must position the driver’s vehicle:
(a)  so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to:
(i)  the angle indicated by the road marking or parking control sign, or
(ii)  if the road marking or parking control sign does not indicate an angle—45°, and
(b)  if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the front of the vehicle nearest to the centre of the road.
(4A)  Subrule (4) does not apply if the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at an angle of 90°.
Examples for subrule (4). 

Example 5

Parking “rear in” at 30° at the side of a road

Example 6

Parking “rear in” at 30° in a median strip parking area

Example 7

Parking “rear in” at 45° at the side of a road

Example 8

Parking “rear in” at 45° in a median strip parking area

Example 9

Parking “rear in” at 60° at the side of a road

Example 10

Parking “rear in” at 60° in a median strip parking area

(5)  This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike.
Note. Motor bike is defined in the Dictionary.

Division 10 Other parking related rules

Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a provision of this Division.

211   Parking in parking bays

(1)  This rule applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in an area, that has parking bays (whether or not a park in bays only sign applies to the length of road or area).
Note. Parking bay is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Park in bays only sign

(2)  The driver must position the driver’s vehicle completely within a single parking bay, unless the vehicle is too wide or long to fit completely within the bay.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Vehicle includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).
(3)  If the vehicle is too wide or long to fit completely within a single parking bay, the driver must park the driver’s vehicle within the minimum number of parking bays needed to park the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3–1)  This rule does not apply to a driver parking in a pay parking area.
Note 1. Pay parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 211 of the Australian Road Rules. Rules 207–1 to 207–9 make provision for parking in pay parking areas.

212   Entering and leaving a median strip parking area

(1)  If information on or with a traffic control device indicates that a driver must enter or leave a median strip parking area in a particular direction, the driver must enter or leave the area in that direction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Median strip parking area, traffic control device and with are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If there is no information on or with a traffic control device that indicates that a driver must enter or leave a median strip parking area in a particular direction, the driver must enter or leave the area by driving forward.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Example. 

Leaving median strip parking area by driving forward

213   Making a motor vehicle secure

(1)  This rule applies to the driver of a motor vehicle who stops and leaves the vehicle on a road, except so far as the driver is exempt from this rule by an exemption order under rule 213–1 or an exemption under rule 313A (2).
Note 1. Motor vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (1) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 213 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to provide for drivers to be exempted from this rule. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2)  Before leaving the vehicle, the driver must apply the parking brake effectively or, if weather conditions (for example, snow) would prevent the effective operation of the parking brake, effectively restrain the motor vehicle’s movement in another way.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the vehicle, the driver must switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the vehicle, and:
(a)  there is no-one left in the vehicle, or
(b)  there is only a child or children under 16 years old left in the vehicle,
      the driver must remove the ignition key before leaving the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the vehicle and there is no-one left in the vehicle, the driver must:
(a)  if the windows of the vehicle can be secured—secure the windows immediately before leaving the vehicle, and
(b)  if the doors of the vehicle can be locked—lock the doors immediately after leaving the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Window is defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  For the purposes of subrule (5), a window is secure even if it is open by up to 2 centimetres.

213–1   NSW rule: exemption orders for rule 213

(cf RRR, cl 22A)

(1)  The Authority may, by order in writing (an exemption order), exempt any class of motor vehicles from the operation of rule 213 (3) and (4) if the Authority is satisfied that:
(a)  such vehicles are used for the purpose of delivering or collecting goods (including money) in circumstances that require the drivers of those vehicles to enter and leave those vehicles at frequent intervals, and
(b)  the engines of such vehicles have to be kept running in order to operate equipment used in connection with the use of those vehicles for that purpose.
Note. Authority is defined in the Act.
(2)  An exemption order may be made subject to such conditions as the Authority considers appropriate.
(3)  For the purposes of rule 213 (1), the driver of a vehicle to which an exemption order applies is exempt from the operation of rule 213 (3) and (4) so long as the driver complies with any condition to which the order is subject.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

Part 13 Lights and warning devices

Division 1 Lights on vehicles (except bicycles, animals and animal-drawn vehicles)

214   Division does not apply to riders of bicycles, animals or animal-drawn vehicles

This Division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, animal or animal-drawn vehicle.
Note 1. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The rules for using lights when riding a bicycle or an animal-drawn vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather conditions, are:
•  for riders of bicycles—rule 259
•  for riders of animal-drawn vehicles—rule 223.

214–1   NSW rule: interpretation

(cf RRR, cl 52)

In this Division:

dipping device has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007.

fog light means a light used to improve the illumination of the road in case of fog, snowfall, heavy rain or a dust storm.

headlight means a headlight of the kind referred to in the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007.

period of darkness means:

(a)  any time during the night, or
(b)  any other time when there is insufficient daylight to render a person dressed in dark clothing discernible at a distance of 100 metres.

Note 1. Night is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. There are no corresponding definitions for the purposes of Division 1 of Part 13 of the Australian Road Rules. These definitions are required for the purposes of the NSW rules contained in this Division.

215   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 215 (Using lights when driving at night or in hazardous weather conditions) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

215–1   NSW rule: using lights when driving in dark

(cf RRR, cl 53)

(1)  A driver must not drive during a period of darkness unless the lights required by Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 to be fitted to the vehicle are lighted.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Period of darkness is defined in rule 214–1.
(2)  Subrule (1) does not apply to any lights required or permitted during a period of darkness under these Rules or Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 to be extinguished by the operation of a dipping device or otherwise.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. This rule applies in this jurisdiction instead of rule 215 of the Australian Road Rules.

216   Towing a vehicle at night or in hazardous weather conditions

(1)  A driver must not tow a vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility unless:
(a)  if the towed vehicle is being towed from the front of the vehicle:
(i)  the tail lights of the vehicle are operating effectively and are clearly visible, or
(ii)  the vehicle has portable rear lights that are operating, or
(b)  if the towed vehicle is being towed from the rear of the vehicle—the vehicle has portable rear lights that are operating.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Night is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  However, this rule does not apply to the driver of a tow truck if:
(a)  the driver is towing a disabled vehicle carrying a placard load of dangerous goods to a place that is safely off the road, and
(b)  a vehicle carrying a warning to other traffic is following immediately behind the disabled vehicle.
(3)  In this rule:

portable rear lights means:

(a)  for a vehicle being towed from the front of the vehicle—a pair of lights attached to the rear of the vehicle that, when operating, show a red light that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the rear of the vehicle, and
(b)  for a vehicle being towed from the rear of the vehicle—a pair of lights attached to the front of the vehicle that, when operating, show a red light that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the front of the vehicle.

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note 1. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. The definitions of dangerous goods and placard load in rule 216 (3) have not been reproduced in these Rules. Those definitions in the Australian Road Rules allow the terms to be defined in another law of this jurisdiction. Accordingly, dangerous goods and placard load are defined in the Dictionary.

217   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note 1. Rule 217 (Using fog lights) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

218   Using headlights on high-beam

(1)  The driver of a vehicle must not use the vehicle’s headlights on high-beam, or allow the vehicle’s headlights to be used on high-beam, if the driver is driving:
(a)  less than 200 metres behind a vehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver, or
(b)  less than 200 metres from an oncoming vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. High-beam and oncoming vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  However, if the driver is overtaking a vehicle, the driver may briefly switch the headlights from low-beam to high-beam immediately before the driver begins to overtake the vehicle.
Note. Low-beam and overtake are defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. 

Example 1

Using headlights on low-beam when travelling less than 200 metres behind another vehicle travelling in the same direction

Example 2

Using headlights on low-beam when travelling within 200 metres of an oncoming vehicle

218–1   NSW rule: using lights on vehicles generally

(cf RRR, cl 55)

The driver of a vehicle must not:
(a)  use any fog light fitted to the vehicle unless the driver is driving in fog, mist or under other atmospheric conditions that restrict visibility, or
(b)  use any spot or search light fitted to the vehicle unless:
(i)  the vehicle is stationary and the light is used only for the purpose of examining or making adjustments or repairs to a vehicle, and the light from the light is not projected more than 6 metres, or
(ii)  the light is used for the temporary purpose of reading any finger or notice board or house number, or
(iii)  the vehicle is being driven or used by a police officer in the performance of the officer’s duty, or
(iv)  the vehicle is being used by a governmental or semi-governmental or local government or other authority in connection with its functions, or
(c)  use any additional headlight permitted to be fitted to the vehicle by Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 when the vehicle is being driven on a length of road for which there is provision for the lighting by means of road lighting or when any approaching vehicle is visible to the driver, or
(d)  flash any headlight or additional headlight permitted to be fitted to the vehicle by clause 86 (6) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 unless:
(i)  the vehicle is being used to respond to an emergency, and
(ii)  the vehicle is being driven by a person who is authorised to drive the vehicle and wears a badge or other distinguishing mark indicating that authority, or
(e)  use any light permitted to be fitted to the vehicle by clause 124 (4)–(9) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 unless:
(i)  the vehicle is standing in a hazardous position or moving in hazardous circumstances, or
(ii)  the vehicle is an ambulance, police vehicle, fire fighting vehicle, mines rescue or other rescue vehicle, Red Cross vehicle or another emergency vehicle that is being used for urgent purposes arising from an accident, fire or other emergency, or
(iii)  the vehicle is a motor vehicle or trailer that is transporting any load that exceeds the maximum length, width or height limits set out in Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 or any other vehicle used to escort such vehicles and either vehicle is being used for such purposes, or
(iv)  the vehicle is being used by the Authority for law enforcement purposes, or
(f)  use any device referred to in clause 125 of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 or any hazard warning signal complying with the requirements of the third edition ADR relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices:
(i)  if the vehicle is not a bus—unless the vehicle is standing in a hazardous position or moving in hazardous conditions, or
(ii)  if the vehicle is a bus—unless the bus is standing in a hazardous position or moving in hazardous conditions or while the bus is stopped to allow a passenger to get on or off the bus.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bus, emergency vehicle, motor vehicle, police officer, police vehicle, third edition ADR and trailer are defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule 15. Fog light, headlight and period of darkness are defined in rule 214–1, and Authority is defined in the Act.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. This rule applies in this jurisdiction instead of rules 215, 217, 221 and 222 of the Australian Road Rules.

219   Lights not to be used to dazzle other road users

A driver must not use, or allow to be used, any light fitted to or in the driver’s vehicle to dazzle, or in a way that is likely to dazzle, another road user.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and road user is defined in rule 14.
Note 2. Driver includes a person in control of a vehicle—see the definition of drive in the Dictionary.

220   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 220 (Using lights on vehicles that are stopped) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

220–1   NSW rule: using lights on stationary vehicles

(cf RRR, cl 58)

(1)  A driver must not stand a motor vehicle or trailer on a road during a period of darkness unless the rear light and any clearance or side marker light required to be fitted to the vehicle by Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 are lighted.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Motor vehicle and trailer are defined in the Dictionary and period of darkness is defined in rule 214–1.
(2)  Subrule (1) does not apply to:
(a)  a driver who stands the driver’s vehicle on a length of road with street light that renders a motor vehicle or trailer clearly visible, or
(b)  a rider of a motor bike to which a sidecar is not attached.
Note. Driver’s vehicle, length of road, motor bike, motor vehicle, sidecar and trailer are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  A driver must not stand a motor vehicle on a road during a period of darkness with its headlight lighted while the vehicle is not actually engaged in dropping off, or picking up, passengers.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. This rule applies in this jurisdiction instead of rule 220 of the Australian Road Rules.

221   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 221 (Using hazard warning lights) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

221–1   NSW rule: using crimson flashing warning lights on certain local council vehicles

(cf RRR, cl 56)

(1)  Without limiting rule 218–1 (e), a driver must not use any crimson flashing warning light permitted to be fixed to a motor vehicle by clause 124 (4)–(9) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 unless the vehicle is being used by an employee of a local council for the purposes of enforcing excess weight limits legislation.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Local council and motor vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

excess weight limits legislation means any of the following:

(a)  Chapter 3 of the Road Transport (General) Act 2005,
(b)  the Road Transport (Mass, Loading and Access) Regulation 2005.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

221–2   NSW rule: using flashing warning lights on street vending vehicles

(cf RRR, cl 57)

(1)  The driver of a street vending vehicle must cause any prescribed flashing warning light that is fitted to the vehicle to be lighted while the vehicle is standing for the purpose of attending to customers.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  Except as provided by subrule (1), the driver of a street vending vehicle must not cause or permit any prescribed flashing warning light that is fitted to the vehicle to be lighted while the vehicle is on a road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  In this rule:

prescribed flashing warning light means the light required to be fitted to street vending vehicles by clause 126 (Flashing lights on other vehicles—street vending vehicles) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007.

street vending vehicle has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

222   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 222 (Using warning lights on buses carrying children) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

222–1   NSW rule: using four-way flashers on school buses

(cf RRR, cl 93 (1), (2), (6) and (7))

(1)  If a bus fitted with a four-way flasher is being driven for school purposes, the driver must operate the four-way flasher when the bus is stopped to allow passengers to get on or off the bus.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bus is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  For the purposes of this rule, a bus is driven for school purposes if the bus is being used:
(a)  solely or principally for the conveyance of children to or from school, and
(b)  on a journey wholly outside a transport district.
Note. Transport district is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  This rule does not apply to the driver of a bus that is operated in accordance with rule 222–2.
Note. Rule 222–2 provides for the use by drivers of warning systems fitted to buses used to convey school children.
(4)  In this rule:

four-way flasher means:

(a)  a device referred to in clause 125 (1) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007, or
(b)  direction indicator lights that can be operated as referred to in clause 113 (4) of that Schedule, or
(c)  any hazard warning signal device complying with the requirements of the third edition ADR relating to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices.

Note 1. Third edition ADR is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

222–2   NSW rule: using warning systems for buses carrying school children

(cf RRR, cl 94)

(1)  A driver must not drive a bus for school purposes unless a warning system is attached to the bus.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  The driver of a bus being used for school purposes must activate the flashing lights of a warning system when stopping the bus to drop off, or pick up, children.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  The driver of a bus must not activate the flashing lights of a warning system fitted to the bus when the bus is not being used for school purposes.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  For the purposes of this rule, a bus is driven or used for school purposes if:
(a)  it is being used to convey children (whether with or without adult passengers) to or from school:
(i)  between 7.00 am and 9.30 am on a weekday, or
(ii)  between 2.30 pm and 5.00 pm on a weekday, or
(b)  it is used solely for the purpose of conveying children to or from school.
(5)  This rule does not apply to the following drivers:
(a)  the driver of a bus:
(i)  that is operating on charter for a school excursion or being used for community service activities, and
(ii)  where no individual fares are being directly collected or school passes used,
(b)  the driver of a bus that is owned by a person that the Authority has exempted from compliance with clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.
Note. Authority is defined in the Act.
(6)  In this rule:

warning system has the same meaning as in clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999.

Note 1. Clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 requires the owner of a bus that is used for school purposes not to permit the bus to be driven unless a warning system is attached to the bus.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

Division 2 Lights on animal-drawn vehicles

223   Using lights when riding an animal-drawn vehicle at night or in hazardous weather conditions

A person must not ride an animal-drawn vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the vehicle is fitted with, and displays:
(a)  a white light fitted at or towards the front of each side of the vehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the front of the vehicle, and
(b)  a red light fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the vehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the rear of the vehicle, and
(c)  a red reflector fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the vehicle that is:
(i)  not over 1.5 metres above ground level, and
(ii)  clearly visible for at least 50 metres from the rear of the vehicle when light is projected onto it by another vehicle’s headlight on low-beam.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Low-beam and night are defined in the Dictionary.

Division 3 Horns and radar detectors

224   Using horns and similar warning devices

A driver must not use, or allow to be used, a horn, or similar warning device, fitted to or in the driver’s vehicle unless:
(a)  it is necessary to use the horn, or warning device, to warn other road users or animals of the approach or position of the vehicle, or
(b)  the horn, or warning device, is being used as part of an anti-theft device, or an alcohol interlock device, fitted to the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Driver’s vehicle and alcohol interlock device are defined in the Dictionary and road user is defined in rule 14.
Note 2. Driver includes a person in control of a vehicle—see the definition of drive in the Dictionary.

225   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note 1. Rule 225 (Using radar detectors and similar devices) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

Rule 225 of the Australian Road Rules is unnecessary in this jurisdiction because section 48 (2) of the Act makes it an offence for a person to drive a motor vehicle, or cause a motor vehicle or trailer to stand, on a road or road related area if a prohibited speed measuring evasion article is fitted or applied to, or carried in, the vehicle or trailer.

Division 4 Portable warning triangles for heavy vehicles

226   Heavy vehicles to be equipped with portable warning triangles

(1)  A person must not drive a vehicle with a GVM over 12 tonnes unless the vehicle is equipped with at least 3 portable warning triangles.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Portable warning triangle is defined in the Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the Act.
(2)  The person must produce the portable warning triangles for inspection if the person is directed to do so by a police officer or an authorised person.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Authorised person and police officer are defined in the Dictionary.
(2–1)  This rule does not apply to the driver of a bus that is being used to provide a regular bus service wholly within a transport district.
Note 1. Bus, regular bus service and transport district are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 226 of the Australian Road Rules.

227   Using portable warning triangles

(1)  This rule applies to a driver if the GVM of the driver’s vehicle is over 12 tonnes.
Note. Driver’s vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the Act.
(2)  If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being carried by the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed limit is 80 kilometres per hour or more and the vehicle is not visible at any time for at least 300 metres in all directions from that place, the driver must use at least 3 portable warning triangles, placed in accordance with subrule (4), to warn other road users of the vehicle or load.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Portable warning triangle is defined in the Dictionary, road is defined in subrule (7) and road user is defined in rule 14.
(3)  If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being carried by the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed limit is less than 80 kilometres per hour and the vehicle is not visible at any time for at least 200 metres in all directions from that place, the driver must use at least 3 portable warning triangles, placed in accordance with subrule (5), to warn other road users of the vehicle or load.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  For the purposes of subrule (2), the driver must:
(a)  place 1 triangle at least 200 metres, but not over 250 metres, behind the vehicle or fallen load, and
(b)  if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road, place 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a) and the vehicle or fallen load, and
(c)  if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road, place 1 triangle at least 200 metres, but not over 250 metres, in front of the vehicle or fallen load, and
(d)  place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a position that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the position of the vehicle or fallen load.
Note. One-way road is defined in the Dictionary and divided road is defined in subrule (7).
(5)  For the purposes of subrule (3), the driver must:
(a)  place 1 triangle at least 50 metres, but not over 150 metres, behind the vehicle or fallen load, and
(b)  if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road, place 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a) and the vehicle or fallen load, and
(c)  if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road, place 1 triangle at least 50 metres, but not over 150 metres, in front of the vehicle or fallen load, and
(d)  place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a position that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the position of the vehicle or fallen load.
(6)  A reference to “the vehicle or fallen load” in subrules (4) and (5) is to be read as a reference to “the vehicle or fallen load, as the case may be”.
(6–1)  This rule does not:
(a)  apply to the driver of a bus that is being used to provide a regular bus service wholly within a transport district, or
(b)  require the driver of a vehicle to place a triangle in front of the vehicle if the vehicle is on a one-way or divided road.
Note 1. Bus, regular bus service and transport district are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 227 of the Australian Road Rules.
(7)  In this rule:

divided road means any length of a two-way road that has a median strip (other than a painted median strip).

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note 1. Median strip and two-way road are defined in the Dictionary, road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. Although the presence of a median strip is necessary to establish that a road is a divided road, for the purposes of this rule the median strip is not part of the road (as it is a road related area).
Note 3. The definition of divided road is not uniform with the corresponding definition in rule 227 of the Australian Road Rules. Different definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

Part 14 Rules for pedestrians

Division 1 General

Note 1. For these Rules, a pedestrian includes:
•  a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at over 10 kilometres per hour (on level ground)
•  a person in a non-motorised wheelchair
•  a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised wheelchair
•  a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy (see rule 18).
Note 2. Wheelchair, wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the Dictionary.

228   No pedestrians signs

A pedestrian must not travel past a no pedestrians sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

 

No pedestrians sign

229   Pedestrians on a road with a road access sign

A pedestrian must not be on a length of road to which a road access sign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that pedestrians are not permitted beyond the sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Length of road and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the way in which a road access sign applies, see rule 97. The sign is usually used on a freeway.
 

Road access sign

Note for diagram. The sign may indicate that it applies to different or additional vehicles or persons—see rule 316 (4).

229–1   NSW Rule: exemption from prohibition on pedestrians being on a road with a road access sign

Rule 229 does not apply to:
(a)  the driver or passenger of a truck while in a truck parking area, or
(b)  the driver of a public bus used to provide a public passenger service, while in a bus parking area, or
(c)  a person approaching or waiting in a bus zone or at a bus stop to be picked up as a passenger on a public bus providing a public passenger service, or a person leaving a bus zone or bus stop after being dropped off as such a passenger, or
(d)  a person who is authorised to maintain facilities in a bus parking area, while in the bus parking area for that purpose.
Note 1. Bus parking area, footpath, public bus, public passenger service, truck and truck parking area are defined in the Dictionary. Bus zone is defined in rule 183 (2).
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

230   Crossing a road—general

(1)  A pedestrian crossing a road:
(a)  must cross by the shortest safe route, and
(b)  must not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  However, if the pedestrian is crossing the road at an intersection with traffic lights and a pedestrians may cross diagonally sign, the pedestrian may cross the road diagonally at the intersection.
Note. Intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
 

Pedestrians may cross diagonally sign

231   Crossing a road at pedestrian lights

(1)  A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place on a road, with pedestrian lights and traffic lights must comply with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection, pedestrian lights and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the pedestrian lights show a red pedestrian light and the pedestrian has not already started crossing the intersection or road, the pedestrian must not start to cross until the pedestrian lights change to green.
Note 1. Green pedestrian light and red pedestrian light are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. A traffic control device (including pedestrian lights) generally only applies to a person if the device faces the person—see Part 20, Division 3, especially rule 340.
(3)  If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the pedestrian lights change to flashing red or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of travel of the pedestrian) of the following:
(a)  a dividing strip, safety zone, or traffic island, forming part of the area set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at the intersection or place (the safety area),
(b)  the nearest side of the road.
Note. Dividing strip and traffic island are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(4)  If, under subrule (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area, the pedestrian must remain in the safety area until the pedestrian lights change to green.
(5)  However, if the pedestrian cannot operate the pedestrian lights from the safety area, the pedestrian may cross to the far side of the road when:
(a)  the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing, and
(b)  it is safe to do so.
Note. Red traffic light is defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
 

Red pedestrian light showing red pedestrian symbol

Green pedestrian light showing green pedestrian symbol

232   Crossing a road at traffic lights

(1)  A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place on a road, with traffic lights, but without pedestrian lights, must comply with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection, pedestrian lights and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the traffic lights show a red or yellow traffic light and the pedestrian has not already started crossing the intersection or road, the pedestrian must not start to cross until the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing.
Note. Green traffic light, red traffic light and yellow traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the traffic lights change to yellow or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of travel of the pedestrian) of the following:
(a)  a dividing strip, safety zone, or traffic island, forming part of the area set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at the intersection or place (the safety area),
(b)  the far side of the road.
Note. Dividing strip and traffic island are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(3A)  Despite subrule (3), in the circumstances set out in that subrule the pedestrian may instead return to the side of the road, or to the safety area, that he or she has just left, but only if:
(a)  at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer to him or her than the side or safety area (whichever is the closer) that he or she was heading for at that time, and
(b)  he or she does not stay on the road for longer than is necessary to return to that side or safety area.
(4)  If, under subrule (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area, the pedestrian must remain in the safety area until the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing.
(5)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

233   Crossing a road to or from a tram

(1)  A pedestrian must not cross a road to get on a tram at a tram stop until the tram has stopped at the tram stop.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Tram is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A pedestrian crossing a road after getting off a tram:
(a)  must cross to the nearest footpath by the shortest safe route or, if there is no footpath, cross the road by the shortest safe route, and
(b)  must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross the road safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Footpath is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  This rule does not apply to a pedestrian:
(a)  on a safety zone, or
(b)  crossing a road to or from a safety zone.
Note. Safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(4)  Subrule (2) does not apply to:
(a)  a pedestrian in a shared zone, or
(b)  an employee of a public transport operator who is in uniform and engaged in carrying out his or her duties.
Note. Shared zone is defined in rule 24.
(5)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

tram includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.

Note 1. Bus and travelling along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary, road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.
Note 2. For the duties of drivers where there are pedestrians getting on or off trams or buses, or in safety zones, see rules 162 to 164A.

234   Crossing a road on or near a crossing for pedestrians

(1)  A pedestrian must not cross a road, or part of a road, within 20 metres of a crossing on the road, except at the crossing or another crossing, unless the pedestrian is:
(a)  crossing, or helping another pedestrian to cross, an area of the road between tram tracks and the far left side of the road to get on, or after getting off, a tram or public bus, or
(b)  crossing to or from a safety zone, or
(c)  crossing at an intersection with traffic lights and a pedestrians may cross diagonally sign, or
(d)  crossing in a shared zone, or
(e)  crossing a road, or a part of a road, from which vehicles are excluded, either permanently or temporarily.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Intersection, public bus, traffic lights, tram and tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary, safety zone is defined in rule 162, and shared zone is defined in rule 24.
(2)  A pedestrian must not stay on a crossing on a road for longer than necessary to cross the road safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  Subrule (2) does not apply to a person who:
(a)  has been authorised to conduct a scheme under Part 10 (Child safety) of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999, and
(b)  is on the crossing for the purpose of carrying out the scheme.
Note 1. Subrule (3) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 234 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to permit a person who is helping pedestrians cross a road at a crossing to stay on the crossing for longer than is necessary for road safety. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
Note 2. Part 10 (Child safety) of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 enables the Authority to authorise persons to conduct schemes designed to assist children to cross roads with safety.
(4)  In this rule:

crossing means a children’s crossing, marked foot crossing or pedestrian crossing.

Note. Children’s crossing is defined in rule 80, marked foot crossing is defined in the Dictionary, and pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.
 

Pedestrians may cross diagonally sign

235   Crossing a level crossing

(1)  A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level crossing unless:
(a)  there is a pedestrian facility at the crossing and the pedestrian uses the facility, or
(b)  there is no pedestrian facility at, or within 20 metres of, the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Level crossing is defined in rule 120.
Note 2. If the pedestrian facility is a footpath or shared path at which there is a red pedestrian light, rule 235A imposes further obligations on pedestrians using the facility.
(2)  A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level crossing if:
(a)  warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red lights) are flashing or warning bells are ringing, or
(b)  a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening or closing, or
(c)  a train or tram is on or entering the crossing, or
(d)  a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the crossing or is sounding a warning, and there would be a danger of the pedestrian being struck by the train or tram if the pedestrian entered the crossing, or
(e)  the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Example for subrule (2) (e). The crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, may be blocked by congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by stock on the road.
Note. Enter and twin red lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2A)  If any of the following events occurs after a pedestrian has started to cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level crossing, he or she must finish crossing the line or tracks without delay:
(a)  warning lights start flashing or warning bells start ringing,
(b)  a gate, boom or barrier starts to close,
(c)  a train or tram approaches the crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  In this rule:

pedestrian facility means a footpath, bridge or other structure designed for the use of pedestrians.

Note. Footpath is defined in the Dictionary.

235A   Crossing a pedestrian level crossing that has a red pedestrian light

(1)  A pedestrian level crossing is an area where a footpath or shared path crosses a railway or tram tracks at substantially the same level.
Note. Footpath, shared path and tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If a pedestrian approaches a pedestrian level crossing that has a red pedestrian light, he or she must not start to cross the crossing while the light is red.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Red pedestrian light is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  If a red pedestrian light at a pedestrian level crossing appears after a pedestrian has started to cross the crossing, he or she must finish crossing the crossing without delay.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Red pedestrian light is defined in the Dictionary.
 

Red pedestrian light showing red pedestrian symbol

236   Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard or obstruction

(1)  A pedestrian must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into the path of a driver.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A pedestrian must not unreasonably obstruct the path of any driver or another pedestrian.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  For subrule (2), a pedestrian does not unreasonably obstruct the path of another pedestrian only by travelling more slowly than other pedestrians.
(4)  A pedestrian must not stand on, or move onto, a road to:
(a)  solicit contributions, employment or business from an occupant of a vehicle, or
(b)  hitchhike, or
(c)  display an advertisement, or
(d)  sell or offer articles for sale, or
(e)  wash or clean, or offer to wash or clean, the windscreen of a vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(5)  A driver, or a passenger, in or on a vehicle must not buy, or offer to buy, an article or service from a person standing on a road.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(6)  Subrules (4) and (5) do not apply to the carrying on of an activity permitted by another law of this jurisdiction.
(7)  In this rule:

road includes any shoulder of the road, and any median strip, painted island or traffic island, but does not include any other road related area.

Note. Median strip, painted island and traffic island are defined in the Dictionary, shoulder is defined in rule 12, and road related area is defined in rule 13.

237   Getting on or into a moving vehicle

(1)  A person must not get on, or into, a moving vehicle unless:
(a)  the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and is required to get in or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequent intervals, and
(b)  the vehicle is not travelling at a speed over 5 kilometres per hour.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  This rule does not apply to a person who is getting on or off a bicycle or animal.
Note 1. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 269 (1) prohibits a person getting off, or out of, a moving vehicle.

238   Pedestrians travelling along a road (except in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy)

(1)  A pedestrian must not travel along a road if there is a footpath or nature strip adjacent to the road, unless it is impracticable to travel on the footpath or nature strip.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Footpath and nature strip are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A pedestrian travelling along a road:
(a)  must keep as far to the left or right side of the road as is practicable, and
(ab)  must, when moving forward, face approaching traffic that is moving in the direction opposite to which the pedestrian is travelling, unless it is impracticable to do so, and
(b)  must not travel on the road alongside more than 1 other pedestrian or vehicle travelling on the road in the same direction as the pedestrian, unless the pedestrian is overtaking other pedestrians.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  In this rule:

pedestrian does not include a person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy.

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note 1. Road related area is defined in rule 13, shoulder is defined in rule 12, and wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Persons travelling on roads in or on wheeled recreational devices or wheeled toys are dealt with in rule 241.

239   Pedestrians on a bicycle path or separated footpath

(1)  A pedestrian must not be on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, unless the pedestrian:
(a)  is crossing the bicycle path or separated footpath by the shortest safe route, and
(b)  does not stay on the bicycle path or separated footpath for longer than necessary to cross the bicycle path or separated footpath safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary, and bicycle path and separated footpath are defined in subrule (4).
Note 2. Rule 336 deals with how parts of a separated footpath are designated for bicycle riders and pedestrians.
(2)  However, a pedestrian may be on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, if:
(a)  the pedestrian is:
(i)  in or pushing a wheelchair, or
(ii)  on rollerblades, rollerskates or a similar wheeled recreational device, and
(b)  there is no traffic control device, or information on or with a traffic control device, applying to the bicycle path or separated footpath that indicates that the pedestrian is not permitted to be on the bicycle path or the part of the separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles.
Note 1. Traffic control device, wheelchair, wheeled recreational device and with are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 243 (2) provides that a person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar wheeled recreational device, on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the path of any bicycle.
(3)  A pedestrian who is crossing a bicycle path, or a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the path of any bicycle, or any pedestrian who is permitted under subrule (2) to be on the bicycle path, or the part of the separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  In these Rules:

bicycle path means a length of path beginning at a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking, and ending at the nearest of the following:

(a)  an end bicycle path sign or end bicycle path road marking,
(b)  a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking,
(c)  a road (except a road related area),
(d)  the end of the path.
Note. 

Road related area is defined in rule 13.

bicycle path road marking means a road marking on a path, consisting of a bicycle symbol, the words “bicycles only”, or both the bicycle symbol and the word “only”.

Note. 

Bicycle symbol is defined in the Dictionary.

end bicycle path road marking means a bicycle path road marking with the word “end”.

end separated footpath road marking means a separated footpath road marking with the word “end”.

separated footpath means a length of footpath beginning at a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking, and ending at the nearest of the following:

(a)  an end separated footpath sign or end separated footpath road marking,
(b)  a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking,
(c)  a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road marking,
(d)  a road (except a road related area),
(e)  the end of the footpath.
Note. 

Footpath and no bicycles road marking are defined in the Dictionary.

separated footpath road marking means a road marking on a footpath consisting of a pedestrian symbol and a bicycle symbol side by side, with or without the word “only”.

Note. 

Pedestrian symbol is defined in the Dictionary.

 

Bicycle path sign

End bicycle path sign

Separated footpath sign

End separated footpath sign

No bicycles sign

Note for diagrams. A separated footpath sign may have the pedestrian symbol and the bicycle symbol reversed—see rule 316 (4).

Division 2 Rules for persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices and wheeled toys

Note 1. For these Rules, a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy is a pedestrian, not a rider—see rule 18 (d). This Division contains rules that apply only to persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices and wheeled toys.
Note 2. Wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy are defined in the Dictionary.

240A   No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign

A person on a road who is travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy must not travel past a no wheeled recreational devices or toys sign.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

 

No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign

240   Wheeled recreational devices and toys not to be used on certain roads

(1)  A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy on:
(a)  a road with a dividing line or median strip, or
(b)  a road on which the speed limit is greater than 50 kilometres per hour, or
(c)  a one-way road with more than 1 marked lane.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Dividing line, marked lane, median strip and one-way road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device:
(a)  on a road that is declared, under another law of this jurisdiction, to be a road on which wheeled recreational devices are prohibited, or
(b)  on a road at night, or
(c)  on a road at any time while any person travelling in or on the device is wholly or partly assisted in propelling the device by means other than human power.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Night is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (2) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 240 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to prohibit a person from travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device at other times. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(3)  A person must not travel in or on a wheeled toy:
(a)  on a road that is declared, under another law of this jurisdiction, to be a road on which wheeled toys are prohibited, or
(b)  on a road at a particular time if another law of this jurisdiction prohibits wheeled toys on all roads, or that road, at that time.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3A)  Subrules (1) and (2) do not apply to a person who is crossing a road in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy, if the person:
(a)  crosses the road by the shortest safe route, and
(b)  does not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road safely, and
(c)  is not prohibited, under another law of this jurisdiction, from crossing the road in or on the wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy.
(4)  In subrules (1) and (2) (b), road does not include a road related area but includes any shoulder of the road.

241   Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a road

(1)  A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy on a road:
(a)  must keep as far to the left side of the road as is practicable, and
(b)  must not travel alongside more than 1 other pedestrian or vehicle travelling on the road in the same direction as the person, unless the person is overtaking other pedestrians.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but, in subrule (1) (b), includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

242   Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy on a footpath or shared path

(1)  A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy on a footpath or shared path must:
(a)  keep to the left of the footpath or shared path unless it is impracticable to do so, and
(b)  give way to any pedestrian (except a person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy) who is on the footpath or shared path.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Footpath is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give way means the person must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note 3. Bicycle riders on footpaths and shared paths must give way to persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices or toys, as well as other pedestrians—see rule 250 (2).
Note 4. Another law of this jurisdiction may prescribe give way rules for persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices or toys.
(2)  A shared path is an area open to the public (except a separated footpath) that is designated for, or has as one of its main uses, use by both the riders of bicycles and pedestrians, and includes a length of path for use by both bicycles and pedestrians beginning at a shared path sign or shared path road marking and ending at the nearest of the following:
(a)  an end shared path sign or end shared path road marking,
(b)  a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road marking,
(c)  a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking,
(d)  a road (except a road related area),
(e)  the end of the path.
Note. Bicycle and no bicycles road marking are defined in the Dictionary, road related area is defined in rule 13, and bicycle path road marking and separated footpath are defined in rule 239.
 

Shared path sign

End shared path sign

No bicycles sign

Bicycle path sign

(3)  In this rule:

end shared path road marking means a shared path road marking with the word “end”.

shared path road marking means a road marking consisting of a pedestrian symbol above a bicycle symbol.

243   Travelling on rollerblades etc on a bicycle path or separated footpath

(1)  A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar wheeled recreational device, must not be on a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of pedestrians unless the person:
(a)  is crossing the separated footpath by the shortest safe route, and
(b)  does not stay on the separated footpath for longer than necessary to cross the separated footpath safely.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Separated footpath is defined in rule 239.
(2)  A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar wheeled recreational device, on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the path of any bicycle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary, and bicycle path is defined in rule 239.

244   Wheeled recreational devices or wheeled toys being towed etc

(1)  A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy that is being towed by a vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy must not hold onto a vehicle while the vehicle is moving.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy must not travel within 2 metres of the rear of a moving motor vehicle continuously for more than 200 metres.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Vehicle is defined in rule 15.

244A   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 244A (Meanings of scooter and motorised scooter) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

244B   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 244B (Wearing of helmets by users of motorised scooters) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

244C   Australian Road Rule not reproduced

*     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 244C (Motorised scooters not to be used) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.

Part 15 Additional rules for bicycle riders

Note 1. This Part contains rules that apply only to bicycle riders. Most rules in these Rules apply to bicycle riders in the same way as they apply to drivers—see rule 19. There are some other rules that are for bicycle riders only, or that have exceptions for bicycle riders. These include:
•  optional hook turn by bicycle riders—rule 35
•  bicycle riders making a hook turn contrary to a no hook turn by bicycles sign—rule 36
•  bicycle riders excepted from giving stop signals—rule 52
•  exception for bicycle riders riding in emergency stopping lanes—rule 95
•  bicycle riders entering and leaving roundabouts—rules 111 and 119
•  bicycle riders overtaking on the left—rule 141
•  riding alongside other riders—rule 151
•  bicycle lanes—rule 153
•  parking at a bicycle rail or in a bicycle rack—rule 166
•  stopping on footpaths—rule 197
•  stopping on a road with a bicycle parking sign—rule 201.
Note 2. Bicycle is defined in the Dictionary.

245   Riding a bicycle

The rider of a bicycle must:
(a)  sit astride the rider’s seat facing forwards (except if the bicycle is not built to be ridden astride), and
(b)  ride with at least 1 hand on the handlebars, and
(c)  if the bicycle is equipped with a seat—not ride the bicycle seated in any other position on the bicycle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

245–1   NSW rule: riding a bicycle negligently, furiously or recklessly

(cf RRR, cl 96A)

(1)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride the bicycle:
(a)  negligently, or
(b)  furiously, or
(c)  recklessly.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  An offence against subrule (1) is not a strict liability offence.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

246   Carrying people on a bicycle

(1)  The rider of a bicycle must not carry more persons on the bicycle than the bicycle is designed to carry.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Example. A single-seat bicycle with a child’s seat attached is designed to carry 2 people, 1 on the bicycle seat and 1 on the attached child’s seat.
(2)  A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not parked, must sit in the seat designed for the passenger.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger unless the passenger complies with subrule (2).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

247   Riding in a bicycle lane on a road

(1)  The rider of a bicycle riding on a length of road with a bicycle lane designed for bicycles travelling in the same direction as the rider must ride in the bicycle lane unless it is impracticable to do so.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Rule 153 defines a bicycle lane and deals with the use of bicycle lanes by other vehicles.
(2)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area.

Note. Road related area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule 13.

247A   Entering a bicycle storage area

(1)  A rider of a bicycle approaching a bicycle storage area at an intersection that has traffic lights or traffic arrows showing a red traffic light or red arrow must not enter the bicycle storage area other than from a bicycle lane, unless the rider is not required to ride in the bicycle lane under these Rules.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  Subrule (1) does not apply if:
(a)  the bicycle storage area cannot, under another law of this jurisdiction, be entered from a bicycle lane, and
(b)  the rider enters the area in accordance with another law of this jurisdiction.

247B   Giving way while entering or in a bicycle storage area

(1)  A rider of a bicycle must when entering a bicycle storage area, give way to:
(a)  any vehicle that is in the area, and
(b)  if the area is before any green or yellow traffic lights, any motor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area, unless the motor vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject to a red traffic arrow, and
(c)  if the area forms part of a lane to which traffic arrows apply, any motor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area at a time when those arrows are green or yellow.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle storage area is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A rider of a bicycle that is in a bicycle storage area that extends across more than one lane of a multi-lane road must, if the area is before any green or yellow traffic lights, give way to a motor vehicle that is in any lane other than the lane that the bicycle is directly in front of, unless the motor vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject to a red traffic arrow.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

248   No riding across a road on a crossing

(1)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride across a road, or part of a road, on a children’s crossing or pedestrian crossing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Children’s crossing is defined in rule 80, and pedestrian crossing is defined in rule 81.
(2)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride across a road, or part of a road, on a marked foot crossing, unless there are bicycle crossing lights at the crossing showing a green bicycle crossing light.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Marked foot crossing is defined in the Dictionary.

249   Riding on a separated footpath

The rider of a bicycle must not ride on a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of pedestrians.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Separated footpath is defined in rule 239, and pedestrian is defined in rule 18.
Note 2. Rule 336 deals with how parts of a separated footpath are designated for bicycle riders and pedestrians.

250   Riding on a footpath or shared path

(1)  The rider of a bicycle who is 12 years old or older must not ride on a footpath unless:
(a)  if the rider is an adult—the rider is accompanying a child under 12 years of age who is riding on the footpath and the child is under the rider’s supervision, or
(b)  if the rider is not an adult—the rider is under the supervision of an accompanying adult as referred to in paragraph (a), or
(c)  the rider is a postal worker who is riding the bicycle in the course of his or her duties as a postal worker.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Footpath and postal worker are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Subrule (1) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 250 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to prohibit a rider of a bicycle who is 12 years old or older from riding on a footpath. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
Note 3. A rider of a bicycle who is under 12 years of age may ride on a footpath unless such a rider is prohibited from doing so under rule 250–1 or rule 252.
(2)  The rider of a bicycle riding on a footpath or shared path must:
(a)  keep to the left of the footpath or shared path unless it is impracticable to do so, and
(b)  give way to any pedestrian on the footpath or shared path.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Pedestrian is defined in rule 18, and shared path is defined in rule 242.
Note 2. For subrule (2), give way means the rider must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(3)  In this rule:

adult means an individual who is 18 years old or older.

Note. There is no corresponding definition for this term for the purposes of rule 250 of the Australian Road Rules. The definition is required for the purposes of subrule (1) (a) and (b).

footpath does not include a separated footpath.

Note. Separated footpath is defined in rule 239.

250–1   NSW rule: children under 12 years not to ride on certain footpaths

(cf RRR, cl 83)

(1)  A rider of a bicycle who is under 12 years old must not ride on any footpath in an area that the Minister has declared, by order published in the Gazette, to be an area in which riding on footpaths by children under 12 years of age is prohibited.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  In this rule:

footpath does not include a separated footpath.

Note 1. Separated footpath is defined in rule 239.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

251   Riding to the left of oncoming bicycle riders on a path

The rider of a bicycle riding on a bicycle path, footpath, separated footpath or shared path must keep to the left of any oncoming bicycle rider on the path.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle path and separated footpath are defined in rule 239, footpath is defined in the Dictionary, and shared path is defined in rule 242.

252   No bicycles signs and markings

(1)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride on a length of road or footpath to which a no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Footpath, length of road and no bicycles road marking are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies to a length of road or footpath beginning at the sign or marking and ending at the nearest of the following:
(a)  a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking,
(b)  a bicycle lane sign,
(c)  a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking,
(d)  a shared path sign,
(e)  an end no bicycles sign,
(f)  the next intersection.
Note. Intersection is defined in the Dictionary, and bicycle path road marking and separated footpath road marking are defined in rule 239.
 

No bicycles sign

Bicycle path sign

Bicycle lane sign

Separated footpath sign

Shared path sign

End no bicycles sign

Note for diagrams. A separated footpath sign may have the pedestrian symbol and the bicycle symbol reversed—see rule 316 (4).

253   Bicycle riders not to cause a traffic hazard

The rider of a bicycle must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into the path of a driver or pedestrian.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

254   Bicycles being towed etc

(1)  A person must not ride on a bicycle that is being towed by another vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Vehicle is defined in rule 15.
(2)  The rider of a bicycle must not hold onto another vehicle while the vehicle is moving.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

255   Riding too close to the rear of a motor vehicle

The rider of a bicycle must not ride within 2 metres of the rear of a moving motor vehicle continuously for more than 200 metres.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Motor vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.

256   Bicycle helmets

(1)  The rider of a bicycle must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the rider’s head, unless the rider is exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Approved bicycle helmet is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not parked, must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the passenger’s head, unless the passenger is:
(a)  a paying passenger on a three or four-wheeled bicycle, or
(b)  exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(3)  The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger on the bicycle unless the passenger complies with subrule (2).

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

257   Riding with a person on a bicycle trailer

(1)  The rider of a bicycle must not tow a bicycle trailer with a person in or on the bicycle trailer, unless:
(a)  the rider is 16 years old, or older, and
(b)  the person in or on the bicycle trailer is under 10 years old, or as otherwise provided under another law of this jurisdiction, and
(c)  the bicycle trailer can safely carry the person, and
(d)  the person in or on the bicycle trailer is wearing an approved bicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the person’s head, unless the person is exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this jurisdiction.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Approved bicycle helmet is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  In this rule:

bicycle trailer means a vehicle that is built to be towed, or is towed, by a bicycle.

Note. Vehicle is defined in rule 15.

258   Equipment on a bicycle

A person must not ride a bicycle that does not have:
(a)  at least 1 effective brake, and
(b)  a bell, horn, or similar warning device, in working order.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

259   Riding at night

The rider of a bicycle must not ride at night, or in hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the bicycle, or the rider, displays:
(a)  a flashing or steady white light that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the front of the bicycle, and
(b)  a flashing or steady red light that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the rear of the bicycle, and
(c)  a red reflector that is clearly visible for at least 50 metres from the rear of the bicycle when light is projected onto it by a vehicle’s headlight on low-beam.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Low-beam and night are defined in the Dictionary.

260   Stopping for a red bicycle crossing light

(1)  The rider of a bicycle approaching or at bicycle crossing lights showing a red bicycle crossing light must stop before reaching the bicycle crossing lights.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle crossing lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Red bicycle crossing light includes a flashing red bicycle crossing light—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  The rider must not proceed until:
(a)  the bicycle crossing lights change to green, or
(b)  there is no red bicycle crossing light showing.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Green bicycle crossing light is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. 

Red bicycle crossing light

Green bicycle crossing light

261   Stopping for a yellow bicycle crossing light

(1)  The rider of a bicycle approaching bicycle crossing lights showing a yellow bicycle crossing light must comply with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Bicycle crossing lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Yellow bicycle crossing light includes a flashing yellow bicycle crossing light—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the rider can stop safely before reaching the bicycle crossing lights, the bicycle rider must stop before reaching the lights.
(3)  If the rider stops before reaching the bicycle crossing lights, and the lights change to red, the bicycle rider must not proceed until:
(a)  the bicycle crossing lights change to green, or
(b)  there is no red or yellow bicycle crossing light showing.
Note. Green bicycle crossing light and red bicycle crossing light are defined in the Dictionary.
 

Yellow bicycle crossing light

262   Proceeding when bicycle crossing lights change to yellow or red

(1)  The rider of a bicycle who is crossing at an intersection, or another place on a road, with bicycle crossing lights and traffic lights must comply with this rule.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bicycle crossing lights, intersection and traffic lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the bicycle crossing lights change from green to yellow, flashing yellow, red or flashing red while the rider is crossing the road, the rider must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of travel of the rider) of the following:
(a)  a dividing strip, safety zone, or traffic island, forming part of the area set aside or used by riders of bicycles to cross the road at the intersection or place (the safety area),
(b)  the far side of the road.
Note. Dividing strip and traffic island are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined in rule 162.
(2A)  Despite subrule (2), in the circumstances set out in that subrule the rider may instead return to the side of the road, or to the safety area, that he or she has just left, but only if:
(a)  at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer to him or her than the side or safety area (whichever is the closer) that he or she was heading for at that time, and
(b)  he or she does not stay on the road for longer than is necessary to return to that side or safety area.
(3)  If, under subrule (2), the rider crosses to the safety area, the rider must remain in the safety area until the bicycle crossing lights change to green.
(4)  However, if the rider cannot operate the bicycle crossing lights from the safety area, the rider may cross to the far side of the road when:
(a)  the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing, and
(b)  it is safe to do so.
Note. Red traffic light is defined in the Dictionary.
(5)  In this rule:

road does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the road.

Note. Road related area is defined in rule 13 and shoulder is defined in rule 12.

Part 16 Rules for persons travelling in or on vehicles

263   Application of Part to persons in or on trams

This Part, except rule 269 (1), does not apply to a person in or on a tram.
Note. Rule 269 (1) prohibits a person getting off, or out of, a moving vehicle.

264   Wearing of seatbelts by drivers

(1)  The driver of a motor vehicle that is moving, or is stationary but not parked, must comply with this rule if the driver’s seating position is fitted with an approved seatbelt.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Driver is defined in rule 16, and motor vehicle and park are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  The driver must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened unless the driver is:
(a)  reversing the vehicle, or
(b)  exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.
Note. Rule 267 provides exemptions from wearing seatbelts.
(2–1)  This rule does not apply to the driver of a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1 or P2 licence.
Note 1. Approved seatbelt, motor bike, motor vehicle, provisional P1 licence and provisional P2 licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence is defined in the Act.
Note 2. Rule 267–1 provides for the use of seatbelts and other restraints by drivers of motor vehicles (other than motor bikes) who are holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their passengers.
Note 3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 264 of the Australian Road Rules.

265   Wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or older

(1)  A passenger in or on a motor vehicle that is moving, or that is stationary but not parked, must comply with subrule (2) if he or she:
(a)  is 16 years old or older, and
(b)  is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(2)  The passenger:
(a)  must occupy a seating position that is fitted with an approved seatbelt, and
(b)  must not occupy the same seating position as another passenger (whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267), and
(c)  must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.
Note. Approved seatbelt is defined in the Dictionary.
(3)  The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus or taxi) that is moving, or that is stationary but not parked, must ensure that each passenger in or on the vehicle who is 16 years old or older complies with subrule (2), unless the passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus, motor vehicle, park and taxi are defined in the Dictionary.
(3–1)  This rule does not apply to the driver of a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1 or P2 licence or to any passenger in a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) driven by such a driver.
Note 1. Motor bike, motor vehicle, provisional P1 licence and provisional P2 licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence is defined in the Act.
Note 2. Rule 267–1 provides for the use of seatbelts and other restraints by drivers of motor vehicles (other than motor bikes) who are holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their passengers.
Note 3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 265 of the Australian Road Rules.
(3–2)  The driver of a motor vehicle does not commit an offence under subrule (3) that arises from the refusal or failure of a passenger to wear a seatbelt properly fastened and adjusted if the passenger is in his or her lawful custody and is being transported by the driver:
(a)  in the course of his or her employment as a juvenile justice officer (within the meaning of the Children (Detention Centres) Act 1987), or
(b)  in the course of his or her employment as a correctional officer (within the meaning of the Crimes (Administration of Sentences) Act 1999), or
(c)  in the course of performing the duties of a correctional officer in accordance with an authority issued under section 240 of the Crimes (Administration of Sentences) Act 1999.
Note 1. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 265 of the Australian Road Rules.

266   Wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years old

(1)  The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus or motor bike) that is moving, or is stationary but not parked, must ensure that this rule is complied with for each passenger in or on the vehicle who is under 16 years old.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus, motor bike, motor vehicle and park are defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  If the passenger is less than 6 months old, he or she must be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted rearward facing approved child restraint.
Note 1. Approved child restraint is defined in subrule (7), approved seatbelt is defined in the Dictionary and rearward facing is defined in subrule (6A).
Note 2. See subrule (4B) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by this subrule because of his or her height or weight.
(2A)  If the passenger is 6 months old or older, but is less than 4 years old, he or she must be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted:
(a)  rearward facing approved child restraint, or
(b)  forward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt harness.
Note 1. Approved child restraint is defined in subrule (7) and forward facing and rearward facing are defined in subrule (6A).
Note 2. See subrule (4C) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by this subrule because of his or her height or weight.
(2B)  If the passenger is 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 years old, he or she must:
(a)  be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted forward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt harness, or
(b)  be placed on a properly positioned approved booster seat and be restrained by an approved seatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened, or
(c)  if he or she is seated in a seating position in a part of the vehicle that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods:
(i)  be restrained by a suitable lap and sash style seatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened, or
(ii)  have his or her hip restrained by a suitable lap type seatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened, and have his or her upper body restrained by an approved child safety harness that is properly adjusted and fastened.
Note 1. Approved child restraint and approved booster seat are defined in subrule (7) and forward facing is defined in subrule (6A).
Note 2. See subrule (4D) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by this subrule because of his or her height or weight.
Note 3. In relation to paragraph (b), subrule (4E) permits an approved child safety harness to be worn instead of the sash part of a lap and sash seatbelt.
Note 4. In relation to paragraph (c), under rule 268 (2), a person may only occupy a seating position in a part of a vehicle that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods if that part of the vehicle is enclosed and that position is suitable for the size and weight of the person.
Note 5. Subrule (2B) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(3)  A passenger who is under 4 years old must not be in the front row of a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats.
(3A)  A passenger who is 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 years old, must not be in the front row of a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats unless there is no available seating position in the row or rows behind the front row in which the passenger can sit in accordance with this rule.
(3A–1)  For the purposes of subrule (3A), an available seating position includes a seating position that is occupied by another passenger who would, under this Part, be able to occupy a different seating position, but does not include a seating position in a part of the vehicle that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods.
Example. Subrule (3A) would permit a 6 year old to sit in the front row of a vehicle that has 2 rows of seats if 2 occupied approved child restraints in the back row encroached on an empty seating position between them in a way that made it impossible for another approved child restraint or booster seat to be placed in that position.
Note. Subrule (3A) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules. Subrule (3A–1) is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(4)  If the passenger is at least 7 years old but under 16 years old:
(a)  he or she must be placed on a properly positioned approved booster seat and be restrained by a seatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened, or
(b)  he or she:
(i)  must occupy a seating position that is fitted with a suitable approved seatbelt, and
(ii)  must not occupy the same seating position as another passenger (whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267), and
(iii)  must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.
Note 1. In relation to paragraph (b) (iii), subrule (4E) permits an approved child safety harness to be worn instead of the sash part of a lap and sash seatbelt.
Note 2. Subrule (4) (a) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(4A)  Subrules (2), (2A), (2B) and (4) do not apply if the passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.
(4A–1)  Subrules (3) and (3A) do not apply if the passenger is, under rule 267–2, exempt from the front seat position restrictions set out in those subrules.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(4B)  If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by subrule (2) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must be restrained as if subrule (2A) applied to him or her.
(4C)  If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by subrule (2A) or (4B) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must be restrained as if subrule (2B) applied to him or her.
(4D)  If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by subrule (2B) or (4C) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must be restrained as if subrule (4) applied to him or her.
(4E)  In the case of a passenger sitting in a seating position that is fitted with a lap and sash type seatbelt, it is sufficient compliance with subrule (2B) (b) or (4) (b) (iii), as the case may be, if, instead of using the sash part of the seatbelt, an approved child safety harness that is properly adjusted and fastened is used to restrain the upper body of the passenger.
Note. Approved child safety harness is defined in subrule (7).
(5)  *     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 266 (5) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. The subrule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.
(5–1)  The provisions of this rule have effect in relation to passengers in or on taxis or small buses who are under 16 years old, subject to the following modifications:
(a)  subrule (2A) applies only in relation to passengers who are 6 months old or older, but less than 12 months old,
(b)  subrule (2B) does not apply to any passengers who are 4 years old or older, but less than 7 years old,
(c)  subrule (4) extends to passengers who are 12 months old or older, but less than 7 years old, in addition to passengers who are 7 years old or older, but under 16 years old.
Note 1. Taxi is defined in the Dictionary and small bus is defined in subrule (7).
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(5A)  *     *     *     *     *
Note. Rule 266 (5A) of the Australian Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. The subrule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road Rules.
(5A–1)  Subrules (2A) and (2B) do not apply to passengers in a motor vehicle who are 12 months old or older, but less than 7 years old if:
(a)  the motor vehicle:
(i)  was manufactured before January 1971, and
(ii)  is used on a road solely in the course of, or as an incident to, an activity of an organisation that is identified in the records of the Authority as an historic vehicle club, and
(iii)  is registered conditionally under clause 13 of the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007, and
(iv)  is the subject of a written advice given by a relevant licensed certifier to the effect that it is not reasonably practicable for any of the restraints referred to in either of subrule (2A) or (2B) to be installed in the vehicle, and that written advice is carried in the vehicle while the passenger is in the vehicle, and
(b)  the passengers are not seated in the front row of the vehicle.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(6)  For this rule:
(a)  an approved child restraint is available in the motor vehicle for a passenger if an approved child restraint is fitted in the vehicle and is not occupied by someone else under 16 years old, and
(b)  an approved child restraint or approved seatbelt is suitable for a passenger if it is suitable for restraining, or to be worn by the passenger.
(6A)  For this rule, a child restraint that is properly fastened and adjusted:
(a)  is forward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, his or her head is closer to the rear of the vehicle than his or her feet, and
(b)  is rearward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, his or her feet are closer to the rear of the vehicle than his or her head.
(6–1)  This rule does not apply to the driver of a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1 or P2 licence.
Note 1. Motor bike, motor vehicle, provisional P1 licence and provisional P2 licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence is defined in the Act.
Note 2. Rule 267–1 provides for the use of seatbelts and other restraints by drivers of motor vehicles (other than motor bikes) who are holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their passengers.
Note 3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(6–2)  The driver of a motor vehicle does not commit an offence under this rule that arises from the refusal or failure of a passenger to wear a seatbelt properly fastened and adjusted if the passenger is in his or her lawful custody and is being transported by the driver in the course of his or her employment as a juvenile justice officer (within the meaning of the Children (Detention Centres) Act 1987).
Note 1. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.
(7)  In this rule:

approved booster seat means any of the following:

(a)  a booster seat or booster cushion that:
(i)  is or was designated as a Type E child restraint under the relevant Australian Standard, and
(ii)  complies with the edition of the relevant Australian Standard that was in force at the time of its manufacture in Australia or importation into Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of the Standard in force at the time the seat or cushion is being used, and
(iii)  has an identifying mark from a body accredited or approved by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand that certifies compliance with the edition concerned of the Standard,
(b)  a booster seat or cushion that:
(i)  is an integrated part of a motor vehicle, and
(ii)  was installed by the manufacturer of the motor vehicle to enable an existing adult lap-sash seatbelt to become suitable for use by a child, and
(iii)  complies with the relevant Australian Design Rules under the Motor Vehicle Standards Act 1989 of the Commonwealth for child restraints of the type concerned that was in force at the time the vehicle was manufactured or imported into Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of those Rules in force at the time the seat or cushion is being used.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 266 (7) of the Australian Road Rules. However, the definition in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to make provision for the approval of booster seats. Different definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

approved child restraint means a child restraint that:

(a)  is or was designated as a Type A1, A2, A3, B or D child restraint under the relevant Australian Standard, and
(b)  complies with the edition of the relevant Australian Standard that was in force at the time of its manufacture in Australia or importation into Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of the Standard in force at the time the restraint is being used, and
(c)  has an identifying mark from a body accredited or approved by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand that certifies compliance with the edition concerned of the Standard.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 266 (7) of the Australian Road Rules. However, the definition in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to make provision for the approval of child restraints. Different definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

approved child safety harness means a harness that:

(a)  is or was designated as a Type C child restraint under the relevant Australian Standard, and
(b)  complies with the edition of the relevant Australian Standard that was in force at the time of its manufacture in Australia or importation into Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of the Standard in force at the time the harness is being used, and
(c)  has an identifying mark from a body accredited or approved by the Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand that certifies compliance with the edition concerned of the Standard.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 266 (7) of the Australian Road Rules. However, the definition in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to make provision for the approval of child safety harnesses. Different definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

relevant Australian Standard means any of the following editions of the Australian/New Zealand Standard for child restraint systems for use in motor vehicles (as in force from time to time):

(a)  AS/NZS 1754:1995,
(b)  AS/NZS 1754:2000,
(c)  AS/NZS 1754:2004,
(d)  any subsequent edition of the Standard.
Note. This is an additional NSW definition. There is no corresponding definition in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.

relevant licensed certifier means a person who is registered as a licensed certifier under the Vehicle Safety Compliance Certification Scheme of the Authority.

Note. This is an additional NSW definition. There is no corresponding definition in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.

small bus means a motor vehicle built mainly to carry people that seats between 9 and 12 (inclusive) adults (including the driver) and that is used to provide a public passenger service.

Note 1. 

Public passenger service is defined in the Dictionary.

Note 2. This is an additional NSW definition. There is no corresponding definition in rule 266 of the Australian Road Rules.

267   Exemptions from wearing seatbelts

(1)  A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:
(a)  the person is authorised by the Authority under rule 268–1 not to comply with rule 268 and is complying with the conditions (if any) of the authorisation, and
(b)  the person is a passenger in or on a motor vehicle with 2 or more rows of seats and there is not another law of this jurisdiction permitting the person to sit in the front row of seats, and the person is not in the front row of seats.
Note 1. Motor vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and Authority is defined in the Act.
Note 2. Subrule (1) (a) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to exempt a person from wearing a seatbelt. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(1A)  A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:
(a)  the seating position that he or she occupies is not fitted with a seatbelt, and
(b)  there is no requirement for that seating position to be fitted with a seatbelt, and
(c)  all passengers in the vehicle who are exempt from wearing a seatbelt are complying with subrule (8).
(1B)  Subrule (1A) does not apply to a person who is under 7 years old.
(1C)  To avoid doubt, subrule (1A) does not authorise a passenger to whom subrule 266 (3) or (3A) applies to occupy a seat in the front row of seats in a vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats.
(2)  A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:
(a)  the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and is required to get in or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequent intervals, and
(b)  the vehicle is not travelling over 25 kilometres per hour.
(3)  A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:
(a)  the person (or, for a passenger, the driver of the vehicle in or on which the person is a passenger) is carrying a certificate (other than a certificate issued under subrule (3A)), issued under another law of this jurisdiction, stating that the person is not required to wear a seatbelt, and
(b)  the person is complying with the conditions (if any) stated in the certificate.
(3A)  A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:
(a)  he or she (or, if he or she is a passenger in or on a vehicle, the vehicle’s driver) is carrying a certificate:
(i)  that is signed by a medical practitioner, and
(ii)  that states that, in the opinion of the medical practitioner, the person should not wear a seatbelt due to the person’s medical condition, and
(iii)  that displays a date of issue, and
(iv)  subject to subrule (3A–1)—that displays an expiry date that is a date not more than 12 months after the date of issue, and
(v)  that has not expired, and
(b)  he or she is complying with any conditions stated in the certificate, and
(c)  there is no other law of this jurisdiction that states that this subrule does not apply in this jurisdiction.
Note 1. Medical practitioner is defined in subrule (9).
Note 2. Subrule (3A) (a) (iv) is not uniform with the corresponding subparagraph in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
Note 3. Rule 353–2 (4) provides that certificates issued before the commencement of these Rules continue in effect for the purposes of this subrule for the period of 6 months after that commencement.
(3A–1)  Subrule (3A) (a) (iv) does not apply to any certificate that belongs to a class of certificates that is exempted, by an order of the Authority, from the requirement to display an expiry date.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules.
(4)  However, a person is not exempt under subrule (3) or (3A) if the person (or, for a passenger, the driver of the vehicle in or on which the person is a passenger) does not immediately produce the certificate mentioned in the subrule for inspection when a police officer or authorised person asks the person (or the driver) whether the person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt.
Note. Authorised person and police officer are defined in the Dictionary.
(4–1)  A person who is under 7 years old is exempt from being restrained in an approved child restraint or placed on an approved booster seat if:
(a)  the vehicle’s driver is carrying a certificate:
(i)  that is signed by a medical practitioner, and
(ii)  that states that, in the opinion of the medical practitioner, the person should not be restrained in the appropriate approved child restraint or placed on an approved booster seat for the person due to the person’s medical condition or disability, and
(b)  the person is being properly restrained in a child restraint that has been designed for, and is suitable for use by, that person or persons with the same medical condition or disability.
Note 1. Approved booster seat and approved child restraint are defined in rule 266. Medical practitioner is defined in subrule (9).
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules.
(5)  A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:
(a)  the person is a passenger in or on a police or emergency vehicle, and
(b)  either:
(i)  if the vehicle has 2 or more rows of seats—the person is not in the front row of seats or there is not a seating position available for the person in another row of seats, or
(ii)  if the vehicle is a police vehicle and has a caged, or other secured, area designed for the carriage of passengers—the person occupies a seating position in that area.
Note. Emergency vehicle and police vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if he or she is providing or receiving medical treatment of an urgent and necessary nature while in or on a vehicle.
(6–1)  A person who is a passenger in a public bus is exempt from wearing a seatbelt (and from any requirement to use a seating position that is fitted with a seatbelt) if:
(a)  the bus is being used to provide a public passenger service (within the meaning of the Passenger Transport Act 1990), and
(b)  the bus is specifically designed for use by standing passengers, and
(c)  in the case where the bus has one or more seating positions that are fitted with seatbelts—all of those seating positions are occupied by other passengers.
Example for subrule (6–1). A passenger may stand in a public bus that is fitted with seatbelts, but only if all of the seats with seatbelts are occupied by other passengers.
Note 1. Public bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules.
(7)  If a truck or bus has a sleeper compartment, a two-up driver of the truck or bus is exempt from wearing a seatbelt while he or she occupies the sleeper compartment for rest purposes.
Note. Bus and truck are defined in the Dictionary.
(8)  If a vehicle does not have seatbelts or approved child restraints fitted to all its passenger seating positions, a passenger who is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under this rule must not occupy a seating position that is fitted with a seatbelt or an approved child restraint if the result would be that a passenger who is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under this rule would be required to occupy a seating position that is not fitted with a seatbelt or an approved child restraint.
(8–1)  A reference in subrule (8) to an approved child restraint includes a reference to an approved booster seat.
Note 1. Approved booster seat and approved child restraint are defined in rule 266.
Note 2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules.
(9)  In this rule:

medical practitioner means a person registered or licensed as a medical practitioner under a law of a State or Territory that provides for the registration or licensing of such persons.

Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 267 of the Australian Road Rules. However, the definition in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to define the term. Different definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.

two-up driver means a person accompanying a driver of a truck or bus on a journey, or part of a journey, who has been, is or will be sharing the task of driving the truck or bus during the journey.

267–1   NSW rule: restraint of drivers who are holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their passengers

(cf RRR, cl 47C)

(1)  This rule applies to the driver of a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1 or P2 licence.
Note. Motor bike, motor vehicle, provisional P1 licence and provisional P2 licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence is defined in the Act.
(2)  The driver must not drive the driver’s vehicle unless:
(a)  the driver and each passenger who is 16 years old or older occupies a seating position fitted with a suitable seatbelt and is wearing the seatbelt properly fastened and adjusted, and
(b)  the driver ensures that each passenger who is under 16 years old is restrained in the appropriate child restraint for a person of the passenger’s age.
(c)  (Repealed)

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. See subrule (2A) for the appropriate child restraint for a passenger who is under 16 years old.
(2A)  For the purposes of subrule (2) (b), a passenger who is under 16 years old is restrained in the appropriate child restraint for a person of the passenger’s age if the passenger is restrained in an approved child restraint, or is using a seat belt, approved booster seat or approved child safety harness, in a manner (including positioning) that is required or permitted under rule 266 for a person of the passenger’s age.
Note 1. Approved booster seat, approved child safety harness and approved child restraint are defined in rule 266.
Note 2. The exemptions in rule 267 (except for those in rule 267 (3A) and (4–1) do not apply in relation to the use of appropriate child restraints. See subrules (4) (a) and (5).
Note 3. Rule 266 does not directly apply to drivers to whom this rule applies. See rule 266 (6–1).
(3)  A person who is 16 years old or older must not travel in or on a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) driven by a driver to whom this rule applies unless the person is occupying a seating position to which a suitable seat belt is fitted and the person is using the seat belt properly fastened and adjusted.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4)  Subrules (2) and (3) do not apply to a driver or passenger if:
(a)  the driver or passenger is exempt from wearing a seat belt, or from being restrained in an approved child restraint or placed on an approved booster seat, under rule 267 (3A) or (4–1), or
(b)  the driver or passenger belongs to a class of persons exempted from the application of the subrule by an order of the Authority.
Note. Approved booster seat and approved child restraint are defined in rule 266. Authority is defined in the Act.
(4A)  If a person who is a passenger in a vehicle is exempt under rule 267–2 from the front seat position restrictions set out in rule 266 (3) or (3A), the driver of the vehicle is not required under this rule to ensure that the passenger is restrained in accordance with those front seat restrictions.
(5)  Except as provided by subrule (4) (a), the exemptions in rule 267 do not apply in relation to the use of seat belts or appropriate child restraints as required by subrule (2) or (3).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

267–2   NSW rule: exemption from front seat position restrictions

(1)  A person who is a passenger in a vehicle is exempt from the front seat position restrictions set out in rule 266 (3) and (3A) if:
(a)  the vehicle’s driver is carrying a certificate:
(i)  that is signed by a medical practitioner, and
(ii)  that states that, in the opinion of the medical practitioner, the person should be in the front row of a motor vehicle while a passenger due to the person’s medical condition, and
(iii)  that displays a date of issue, and
(iv)  subject to subrule (2)—that displays an expiry date that is a date not more than 12 months after the date of issue, and
(v)  that has not expired, and
(b)  he or she is complying with any conditions stated in the certificate, and
(c)  there is no other law of this jurisdiction that states that this subrule does not apply in this jurisdiction.
Note. Medical practitioner is defined in subrule (4).
(2)  Subrule (1) (a) (iv) does not apply to any certificate that belongs to a class of certificates that is exempted, by an order of the Authority, from the requirement to display an expiry date.
(3)  A person is not exempt under subrule (1) if the driver of the vehicle does not immediately produce the certificate mentioned in the subrule for inspection when a police officer or authorised person asks the driver whether the person is exempt from rule 266 (3) or (3A).
Note. Authorised person and police officer are defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  In this rule:

medical practitioner means a person registered or licensed as a medical practitioner under a law of a State or Territory that provides for the registration or licensing of such persons.

Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no corresponding rule in the Australian Road Rules.

268   How persons must travel in or on a motor vehicle

(1)  A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that is not a part designed primarily for the carriage of passengers or goods.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Motor vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2)  A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that is a part designed primarily for the carriage of goods unless:
(a)  the part is enclosed, and
(b)  he or she occupies a seating position that is suitable for the size and weight of the person and that is fitted with a seatbelt.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note 1. Enclosed is defined in subrule (7).
Note 2. Rule 265 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or older, and rule 266 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years old.
(3)  A person must not travel in or on a motor vehicle with any part of the person’s body outside a window or door of the vehicle, unless the person is the driver of the vehicle and is giving a hand signal:
(a)  for changing direction to the right in accordance with rule 50, or
(b)  for stopping or slowing in accordance with rule 55.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Window is defined in the Dictionary.
(4)  The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus) must not drive with a passenger if any part of the passenger’s body is outside a window or door of the vehicle.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Bus is defined in the Dictionary.
(4A)  The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or on a part of the vehicle that is not a part designed primarily for the carriage of passengers or goods.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

(4B)  The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or on a part of the vehicle that is a part designed primarily for the carriage of goods unless:
(a)  the part is enclosed, and
(b)  the person occupies a seating position that is suitable for the size and weight of the person and that is fitted with a seatbelt.

Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.

Note. Rule 265 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or older, and rule 266 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years old.
(5)  This rule does not apply to a person who is:
(a)  in or on a police or emergency vehicle, or
(b)  on a motor bike, or
(c)  engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, in or on a motor vehicle that is not travelling over 25 kilometres per hour.
Note. Emergency vehicle, motor bike, and police vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(6)  This rule also does not apply to a person if:
(a)  in all the circumstances, there is no reasonable danger of the person falling or being thrown from the vehicle or being injured because of the person travelling in a manner prohibited by that rule, or
(b)